installation, operation, and maintenance intellipak

SSAAFFEETTYY WWAARRNNIINNGGOnly qualified personnel should install and service the equipment. The installation, starting up, and servicing of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioningequipment can be hazardous and requires specific knowledge and training. Improperly installed, adjusted or altered equipment by an unqualified personcould result in death or serious injury. When working on the equipment, observe all precautions in the literature and on the tags, stickers, and labels thatare attached to the equipment.

April 2020 SSCCXXFF--SSVVXX0011RR--EENN

Installation, Operation, and Maintenance

IntelliPak™ Commercial Self-ContainedSignature Series20 to 110 Tons

SSCCWWFF aanndd SSIIWWFF – 20 to 110 TonSSCCRRFF aanndd SSIIRRFF – 25 to 60 Ton

©2020 Trane SCXF-SVX01R-EN

IntroductionRead this manual thoroughly before operating orservicing this unit.

Warnings, Cautions, and NoticesSafety advisories appear throughout this manual asrequired. Your personal safety and the properoperation of this machine depend upon the strictobservance of these precautions.

The three types of advisories are defined as follows:

WARNINGIndicates a potentially hazardous situationwhich, if not avoided, could result in death orserious injury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situationwhich, if not avoided, could result in minor ormoderate injury. It could also be used to alertagainst unsafe practices.

NOTICEIndicates a situation that could result inequipment or property-damage onlyaccidents.

Important Environmental ConcernsScientific research has shown that certain man-madechemicals can affect the earth’s naturally occurringstratospheric ozone layer when released to theatmosphere. In particular, several of the identifiedchemicals that may affect the ozone layer arerefrigerants that contain Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon(CFCs) and those containing Hydrogen, Chlorine,Fluorine and Carbon (HCFCs). Not all refrigerantscontaining these compounds have the same potentialimpact to the environment. Trane advocates theresponsible handling of all refrigerants-includingindustry replacements for CFCs and HCFCs such assaturated or unsaturated HFCs and HCFCs.

Important Responsible RefrigerantPracticesTrane believes that responsible refrigerant practicesare important to the environment, our customers, andthe air conditioning industry. All technicians whohandle refrigerants must be certified according to localrules. For the USA, the Federal Clean Air Act (Section608) sets forth the requirements for handling,reclaiming, recovering and recycling of certainrefrigerants and the equipment that is used in theseservice procedures. In addition, some states ormunicipalities may have additional requirements thatmust also be adhered to for responsible managementof refrigerants. Know the applicable laws and followthem.

WWAARRNNIINNGGPPrrooppeerr FFiieelldd WWiirriinngg aanndd GGrroouunnddiinnggRReeqquuiirreedd!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww ccooddee ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorrsseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..AAllll ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg MMUUSSTT bbee ppeerrffoorrmmeedd bbyy qquuaalliiffiieeddppeerrssoonnnneell.. IImmpprrooppeerrllyy iinnssttaalllleedd aanndd ggrroouunnddeeddffiieelldd wwiirriinngg ppoosseess FFIIRREE aanndd EELLEECCTTRROOCCUUTTIIOONNhhaazzaarrddss.. TToo aavvooiidd tthheessee hhaazzaarrddss,, yyoouu MMUUSSTT ffoolllloowwrreeqquuiirreemmeennttss ffoorr ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg iinnssttaallllaattiioonn aannddggrroouunnddiinngg aass ddeessccrriibbeedd iinn NNEECC aanndd yyoouurr llooccaall//ssttaattee//nnaattiioonnaall eelleeccttrriiccaall ccooddeess..

WWAARRNNIINNGGPPeerrssoonnaall PPrrootteeccttiivvee EEqquuiippmmeenntt ((PPPPEE))RReeqquuiirreedd!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo wweeaarr pprrooppeerr PPPPEE ffoorr tthhee jjoobb bbeeiinngguunnddeerrttaakkeenn ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..TTeecchhnniicciiaannss,, iinn oorrddeerr ttoo pprrootteecctt tthheemmsseellvveess ffrroommppootteennttiiaall eelleeccttrriiccaall,, mmeecchhaanniiccaall,, aanndd cchheemmiiccaallhhaazzaarrddss,, MMUUSSTT ffoollllooww pprreeccaauuttiioonnss iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaallaanndd oonn tthhee ttaaggss,, ssttiicckkeerrss,, aanndd llaabbeellss,, aass wweellll aass tthheeiinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww::

•• BBeeffoorree iinnssttaalllliinngg//sseerrvviicciinngg tthhiiss uunniitt,,tteecchhnniicciiaannss MMUUSSTT ppuutt oonn aallll PPPPEE rreeqquuiirreedd ffoorrtthhee wwoorrkk bbeeiinngg uunnddeerrttaakkeenn ((EExxaammpplleess;; ccuuttrreessiissttaanntt gglloovveess//sslleeeevveess,, bbuuttyyll gglloovveess,, ssaaffeettyyggllaasssseess,, hhaarrdd hhaatt//bbuummpp ccaapp,, ffaallll pprrootteeccttiioonn,,eelleeccttrriiccaall PPPPEE aanndd aarrcc ffllaasshh ccllootthhiinngg))..AALLWWAAYYSS rreeffeerr ttoo aapppprroopprriiaattee SSaaffeettyy DDaattaaSShheeeettss ((SSDDSS)) aanndd OOSSHHAA gguuiiddeelliinneess ffoorrpprrooppeerr PPPPEE..

•• WWhheenn wwoorrkkiinngg wwiitthh oorr aarroouunndd hhaazzaarrddoouusscchheemmiiccaallss,, AALLWWAAYYSS rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee aapppprroopprriiaatteeSSDDSS aanndd OOSSHHAA//GGHHSS ((GGlloobbaall HHaarrmmoonniizzeeddSSyysstteemm ooff CCllaassssiiffiiccaattiioonn aanndd LLaabbeelllliinngg ooffCChheemmiiccaallss)) gguuiiddeelliinneess ffoorr iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn oonnaalllloowwaabbllee ppeerrssoonnaall eexxppoossuurree lleevveellss,, pprrooppeerrrreessppiirraattoorryy pprrootteeccttiioonn aanndd hhaannddlliinnggiinnssttrruuccttiioonnss..

•• IIff tthheerree iiss aa rriisskk ooff eenneerrggiizzeedd eelleeccttrriiccaallccoonnttaacctt,, aarrcc,, oorr ffllaasshh,, tteecchhnniicciiaannss MMUUSSTT ppuuttoonn aallll PPPPEE iinn aaccccoorrddaannccee wwiitthh OOSSHHAA,, NNFFPPAA7700EE,, oorr ootthheerr ccoouunnttrryy--ssppeecciiffiicc rreeqquuiirreemmeennttssffoorr aarrcc ffllaasshh pprrootteeccttiioonn,, PPRRIIOORR ttoo sseerrvviicciinnggtthhee uunniitt.. NNEEVVEERR PPEERRFFOORRMM AANNYY SSWWIITTCCHHIINNGG,,DDIISSCCOONNNNEECCTTIINNGG,, OORR VVOOLLTTAAGGEE TTEESSTTIINNGGWWIITTHHOOUUTT PPRROOPPEERR EELLEECCTTRRIICCAALL PPPPEE AANNDDAARRCC FFLLAASSHH CCLLOOTTHHIINNGG.. EENNSSUURREEEELLEECCTTRRIICCAALL MMEETTEERRSS AANNDD EEQQUUIIPPMMEENNTT AARREEPPRROOPPEERRLLYY RRAATTEEDD FFOORR IINNTTEENNDDEEDDVVOOLLTTAAGGEE..

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 3

WWAARRNNIINNGGFFoollllooww EEHHSS PPoolliicciieess!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..

•• AAllll TTrraannee ppeerrssoonnnneell mmuusstt ffoollllooww tthheeccoommppaannyy’’ss EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall,, HHeeaalltthh aanndd SSaaffeettyy((EEHHSS)) ppoolliicciieess wwhheenn ppeerrffoorrmmiinngg wwoorrkk ssuucchh aasshhoott wwoorrkk,, eelleeccttrriiccaall,, ffaallll pprrootteeccttiioonn,, lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt,, rreeffrriiggeerraanntt hhaannddlliinngg,, eettcc.. WWhheerree llooccaallrreegguullaattiioonnss aarree mmoorree ssttrriinnggeenntt tthhaann tthheesseeppoolliicciieess,, tthhoossee rreegguullaattiioonnss ssuuppeerrsseeddee tthheesseeppoolliicciieess..

•• NNoonn--TTrraannee ppeerrssoonnnneell sshhoouulldd aallwwaayyss ffoolllloowwllooccaall rreegguullaattiioonnss..

CopyrightThis document and the information in it are theproperty of Trane, and may not be used or reproducedin whole or in part without written permission. Tranereserves the right to revise this publication at any time,and to make changes to its content without obligationto notify any person of such revision or change.

TrademarksAll trademarks referenced in this document are thetrademarks of their respective owners.

Revision History• Running edits included.

• Updated motor electrical data.

IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn

4 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8R-410A Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Signature Series Self-Contained UnitComponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Standard Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Human Interface Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Unit Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Optional Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Unit Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Model Number Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Commercial Self-Contained SignatureSeries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Commercial Self-Contained Air-CooledCondenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Pre-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Receiving Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Contractor InstallationResponsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Unit Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Unit Protective Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Supply Fan Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Dimensional Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Steam and Hot Water Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Steam Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Hot Water Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Plenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Airside Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Service Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Installation - Mechanical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Unit Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Installation Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Unit Vibration Isolator Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Unit Isolator InstallationProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Duct Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Installing the Plenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Installing the Airside Economizer . . . . . . . . . 37

Water Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Condenser Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Condensate Drain Connections. . . . . . . . 38General WatersideRecommendations for CoolingTowers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Waterside Piping Arrangements. . . . . . . 39Water TemperatureRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Water Piping Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Installating the Hydronic Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Steam and Hot Water Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Refrigerant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Interconnecting Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Preliminary RefrigerantCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Installation - Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Unit Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Supply Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Voltage Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Voltage Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Phase Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Control Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Selection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Static Pressure Transducer Installation(VAV units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Transducer Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Installing the Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Zone Sensor Options for ControlUnits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Standard with All Units:BAYSENS077 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46CV Unit Zone Sensor Options . . . . . . . . . 47

Integrated Comfort Systems Sensors forCV and VAV Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

CV and VAV Unit Zone SensorOptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Zone Sensor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Mounting Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Mounting the Subbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Table of Contents

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 5

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Standard Remote Sensor(BAYSENS077) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Programmable Zone Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49BAYSENS119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Time Clock Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Grasslin Time Clock Option . . . . . . . . . . . 50Installing the Time Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Surface Mounting Inside Panel . . . . . . . . 50Wiring the Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Remote Human Interface PanelInstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Human Interface (HI) Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . 50Remote Human Interface Panel. . . . . . . . 51Location Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 51Ambient Temperature and HumidityLimits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Mounting the Remote Human Interface(RHI) Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Wall Mounting the RHI Panel. . . . . . . . . . 52

Wiring the Remote Human Interface. . . . . . . 53Low Voltage (AC) Field WiringConnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Interprocessor CommunicationBridge Module Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Communication Link (ShieldedTwisted Pair) Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54At the Self-Contained Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Connecting to Tracer Summit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Communication Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Programming the Time ClockOption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Setting the Time Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Programming the Time Clock . . . . . . . . . 55Reviewing and ChangingPrograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Control Sequences of Operation . . . . . . . . . . 57

Occupied/UnoccupiedSwitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Field-Supplied Occupied/Unoccupied Input on the RTM. . . . . . . . . 57

Tracer Summit System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Factory-Mounted Time Clock. . . . . . . . . . 57

Unoccupied Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . 57Morning Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Full Capacity Morning Warm-up(MWU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Cycling Capacity Morning Warm-up(MWU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Timed Override Activation—ICS™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Timed Override Activation—Non-ICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58VAV Drive Max Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Occupied Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Occupied Zone Temperature—Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Zone Temperature Control (UnitModel Number Digit 9 = 4 or 5) . . . . . . . . 58Supply Air Temperature Control(Unit Model Number Digit 9 = 1, 2, 3,or 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Units With Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Cooling/Waterside Economizer. . . . . . . . 59Cooling/Airside Economizer. . . . . . . . . . . 59Mechanical Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Air-Cooled Units Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Water-Cooled Units Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Auto Changeover (Units with HeatOnly). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Occupied Zone Temperature—Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Electric Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Hydronic Heat: Hot Water orSteam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Supply Air Setpoint Reset (VAV UnitsOnly). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Reset Based on OutdoorAirTemperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Reset Based on zonetemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Supply AirTempering (Hot Waterand Steam VAV Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 60Daytime Warm-up (Units withSupply Air Temperature ControlOnly). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Supply AirTempering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

TTaabbllee ooff CCoonntteennttss

6 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Thermostatic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Compressor Cycling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Compressor Lead/LagOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Step Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Compressor Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . 62Low Ambient CompressorLockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Evaporator Coil Frost ProtectionFROSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Service Valve Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Waterside Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Water Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Water Piping Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Basic Water Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Intermediate Water Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Water Flow Switch Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Water-Cooled Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Waterside Economizer Option. . . . . . . . . 63Waterside Economizer FlowControl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Constant Water Flow withIntermediate Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Variable Water Flow withIntermediate Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Unit Airside Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Supply Air Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Low Entering Air TemperatureSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65High Duct TemperatureThermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Dirty Filter Sensor Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Low Ambient Sensor (Air-CooledUnits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Supply Air Static Pressure Limit . . . . . . . 65Variable Frequency DriveOption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65VFD with Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Airside Economizer Option . . . . . . . . . . . 66Comparative Enthalpy Control . . . . . . . . 66Airside Economizers with TraqDamper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Standard Two-Position DamperInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Airside Economizer Interface. . . . . . . . . . 67Airside Economizer Interface withComparative Enthalpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Air-Cooled Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Points List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

RTM Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68GBAS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68ECEM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

BCI-I option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

LCI-I Points List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Phase Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Unit Control Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68RTM Module Board—Standard on allUnits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Compressor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Human Interface Module—Standardon all Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Remote Human Interface ModuleOption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Waterside Module—Standard on AllWater-cooled Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Heat Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Ventilation Override Module (VOM)Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Trane CommunicationsModules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Exhaust/Comparative EnthalpyModule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Ventilation Control Module(VCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Generic Building AutomationSystem Module Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Input Devices and SystemFunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Pre-Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Units with VFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Pre-Startup Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Supply Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Water-Cooled Unit Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Air-Cooled Units Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 7

Units with Hydronic Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Units with Electric Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Air-Cooled Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Final Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Operating & ProgrammingInstructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Startup Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Service Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) . . . . . . . 85

Air Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Inspecting and Cleaning the DrainPan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan . . . . . . . . . . 87

Supply Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Fan Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Fan Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Fan Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Measuring Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Adjusting Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Scroll Compressor Failure Diagnosisand Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9140 Ton Air-Cooled CompressorSuction Restrictor Replacement . . . . . . . 91

Refrigerant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Refrigerant Leak Test Procedure. . . . . . . 92Brazing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93System Evacuation Procedures . . . . . . . 93

Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Scroll Compressor Failure Diagnosisand Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Cleaning Coil Fin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Inspecting and Cleaning Coils . . . . . . . . . 97Steam and Hot Water Coils . . . . . . . . . . . 97Refrigerant Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Draining the Waterside EconomizerCoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Cleaning the Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Chemical Cleaning of Condenser andEconomizer Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Piping Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Water Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Maintenance Periodic Checklists . . . . . . . . . . 99Monthly Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Semi-Annual Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . 100Annual Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Additional Diagnostic Resources . . . . . . . . . 102

Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115


8 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

OverviewNNoottee:: One copy of this document ships inside the

control panel of each unit and is customerproperty. It must be retained by the unit’smaintenance personnel.

This manual describes proper installation, operation,and maintenance procedures for air cooled systems. Bycarefully reviewing the information within this manualand following the instructions, the risk of improperoperation and/or component damage will beminimized. It is important that periodic maintenance beperformed to help assure trouble free operation. Amaintenance schedule is provided at the end of thismanual. Should equipment failure occur, contact aqualified service organization with qualified,experienced HVAC technicians to properly diagnoseand repair this equipment.

This manual covers installation, operation andmaintenance of 20-110 ton Signature SeriesCommercial Self Contained products with R-410Arefrigerant.

R-410A Compressors• Use crank case heaters which must be energized 24

hours prior to compressor start.

• Contain POE oil which readily absorbs potentiallydamaging moisture from air.

• Control box includes a phase monitor to detectphase loss, line voltage imbalance and reversal.

Refer to previous IOM versions for R-407C and R-22units, or contact your local Trane representative.

Refer to the appropriate IOM for air-cooled condenserCXRC-SVX01*-EN and programming IntelliPak™controls PKG-SVP01*-EN.

Signature Series Self-ContainedUnit ComponentsCommercial self-contained units are complete HVACsystems used in floor-by-floor applications. Units areeasy to install because they feature:

• A single point power connection.

• Factory-installed and tested controls.

• A single water point connection.

• Factory-installed options.

• An internally trapped drain connection.

NNoottee:: Refer to the following figure for typical unitcomponents.

The hermetically sealed scroll compressor motorsutilize internal motor protection and time delays toprevent excessive cycling.

Water-cooled units have 2-6 refrigerant circuits andship with a full refrigerant and oil charge. Each circuitincludes filter drier, pressure relief valve, sight glass/moisture indicator, thermal expansion valve withsensing bulb and external equalizing line, dischargeline schrader valve, suction line schrader valve andhigh and low pressure cutout switches. The water-cooled condensers are shell and tube type with aninternal subcooler. Condensers are available asmechanically or chemically cleanable.

Air-cooled units have two circuits and ship with oil anda dry nitrogen holding charge. Therefore, air-cooledunits require field piping refrigerant connections to anair-cooled condensing unit and charging. Each circuitincludes filter drier (field installed), sight glass/moisture indicator, thermal expansion valve withsensing bulb and external equalizing line, dischargeline schrader valve, suction line schrader valve, highand low pressure cutout switches, discharge line checkvalve and liquid line solenoid valve.

All units include liquid line service valves for eachcircuit as standard (suction and discharge servicevalves are optional).

Evaporator fans are double width, double inlet andforward curved with fixed pitch belt drive assembly.Variable frequency drives are optional. EISA efficiencyopen drip proof (ODP) and totally enclosed fan cooled(TEFC) motor options are available.

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 9

Figure 1. Commercial self-contained signature series unit components

Waterside economizer (cleanable option shown)

Sight glasses with ports for viewing while unit is running

Unit mounted microprocessor control with easy-to-read human interface panel

Swing out VFO panel with Tri-VFO for efficient VAV operation

Trane 3-D® Scroll Compressor for reliability, efficiency and quiet operation

Two-bolt connection on cleanable condenser for quick, easy maintenance

Waterside valve package option to enhance system efficiency

Internally trapped drain for low cost installation

2-inch flat filter box inside unit casing

Standard ControlsStandard controls supplied with the unit include thehuman interface (HI) panel with unit control module(UCM). All basic setup parameters are preset from thefactory.

Human Interface PanelThe HI is unit mounted and accessible without openingthe unit’s front panel. It allows easy setpointadjustment using the HI keypad. In addition, the HIdisplays all unit operating parameters and conditionsin a clear language display, which can be configuredfor either English, French, or Spanish.

The optional remote human interface (RHI) will controlup to four self-contained units, each containing aninterprocessor communications bridge (IPCB). It has allthe same features as the unit-mounted HI except for theservice mode.

For more information on setpoint defaults and rangesand unit programming, see the Self-ContainedProgramming Guide, PKG-SVP01*-EN. A copy shipswith each unit.

Unit Control ModuleThe UCM provides “smart” unit control with safetyfeatures and control relays for pumps, dampers, etc.

The Signature Series self-contained unit is controlledby a microelectronic control system that consists of anetwork of modules. Modular Series self-containedunit is controlled by microelectronic control systemconsisting of a network of modules.These modules arereferred to as unit control modules (UCM). In thismanual, the acronym UCM refers to the entire controlsystem network.

These modules perform specific unit functions usingproportional/integral control algorithms. They aremounted in the unit control panel and are factory wiredto their respective internal components. Each modulereceives and interprets information from other unitmodules, sensors, remote panels, and customer binarycontacts to satisfy the applicable request; i.e.,economizing, mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation.

See the Owner’s section of this manual for a detaileddescription of each module’s function.

OOvveerrvviieeww

10 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Figure 2. Right side view of unit Optional ControlsOptional controls include a disconnect switch, dirtyfilter switch, water flow switch (water-cooled only),supply air temperature reset, or external setpointinputs. Daytime heating is available on units withelectric, steam, or hot water heat control options.Morning warm-up operation is available on all units.

The static pressure probe, zone night heat/morningwarm-up, supply air temperature reset sensor optionsship separate inside the unit control panel for fieldinstallation. For more detailed information on the unitcontrol options, see the Owner’s section of thismanual.

Unit NameplateThe unit nameplate identifies the unit model number,appropriate service literature, and wiring diagramnumbers. It is mounted on the left end of the unitcontrol panel.

OOvveerrvviieeww

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 11

Model Number DescriptionCommercial Self-Contained Signature Series

Digit 1 — Unit Model

S = Self-Contained

Digit 2 — Unit Type

C = CommercialI = Industrial

Digit 3 — Condenser Medium

W =Water-cooledR = Air-cooled

Digit 4 — Development Sequence

F = Signature Series

Digit 5— Refrigerant CircuitConfigurationU = Standard CapacityV = High Capacity

Digit 6, 7 — Unit Nominal Capacity

20 = 20 Tons (water only)22 = 22 Tons (water only)25 = 25 Tons (water or air)29 = 29 Tone (water or air)30 = 30 Tons (air only)32 = 32 Tons (water only)35 = 35 Tons (water or air)38 = 38 Tons (water only)40 = 40 Tons (air only)42 = 42 Tons (water only)46 = 46 Tons (water only)50 = 50 Tons (air only)52 = 52 Tons (water only)58 = 58 Tons (water only)60 = 60 Tons (air only)65 = 65 Tons (water only)72 = 72 Tons (water only)80 = 80 Tons (water only)90 = 90 Tons (water only)C0 = 100 Tons (water only)C1 = 110 Tons (water only)

Digit 8 — Unit Voltage

6 = 200 volt/60 hz/3 ph4 = 460 volt/60 hz/3 ph5 = 575 volt/60 hz/3 ph

Digit 9 — Air Volume/Temp Control

2 = VFD and supply air temp ctrl3 = VFD w/ bypass and supply air temp ctrl4 = Constant volume, zone temp cool only5 = Constant volume, w/ zone temp heat/cool6 = Constant volume and supply air temp ctrl

Digit 10, 11 —Design Sequence

**= Factory Assigned

Digit 12 —Unit Construction

A = Vertical dischargeB = Vertical discharge with double wall

Digit 13— Flexible HorizontalDischarge Plenum TypeB = STD plenum w/ factory-cut holesC= Low plenum w/ factory-cut holesE= Std plenum w/ field-cut holesF= Low plenum w/ field-cut holesH= STD plenum double wall w/ field-cutholesJ = Low plenum double wall w/ field-cut holesK= Extended height plenum w/factory-cutholes, ship separateL = STD plenum w/factory-cut holes, shipseparateM = Low plenum w/factory-cut holes, shipseparateN = Extended height plenum w/field-cutholes, ship separateP = STD plenum w/field-cut holes, shipseparateR = Low plenum w/field-cut holes, shipseparateT= Extended height double-wall plenum w/field-cut holes, ship separateU= STD double-wall plenum w/field-cutholes, ship separateV= Low double-wall plenum w/field-cutholes, ship separateW = STD double-wall (perf) plenum w/field-cut holes (90 to110 ton only)X= Low double-wall (perf) plenum w/field-cut holes (90 to 110 ton only)Y = Extended height double-wall (perf)plenum w/field-cut holes, ship separate (90to 110 ton only)0 = None

Digit 14—Motor Type

2 = ODP motor4 = TEFC motor

Digit 15, 16 —Motor HP

05= 5 hp07= 7.5 hp10= 10 hp15= 15 hp20= 20 hp25= 25 hp30= 30 hp40= 40 hp50= 50 hp (460V, 575V only)60= 60 hp (90 to 110 ton only)

Digit 17, 18, 19 – Fan RPM

040 = 400 rpm045 = 450 rpm050 = 500 rpm052 = 525 rpm055 = 550 rpm057 = 575 rpm060 = 600 rpm065 = 650 rpm070 = 700 rpm075 = 750 rpm080 = 800 rpm085 = 850 rpm090 = 900 rpm095 = 950 rpm100 = 1000rpm105 = 1050 rpm110 = 1100 rpm115 = 1150 rpm120 = 1200 rpm125 = 1250 rpm130 = 1300 rpm135 = 1350 rpm

Digit 20— Unit Isolators

A = Steam coilB = Hot water coilC = Electric heat, 1 stageD = Electric heat, 2 stageF = Hydronic heat ctrl interfaceG = Electric heat ctrl interfaceK = Steam coil ship separate, LHL= Hot water coil ship separate, LHT = Hot water coil, high capacity, LHU = Hot water coil, high capacity, LH, shipseparate0 = None


A = IsopadsB = Spring isolators0 = None

Digit 22— Unit Finish

1 = Paint - Slate Gray

Digit 23— Supply Fan Options

0 = Standard fan1 = Low CFM fan

Digit 24— Unit Connection

1 = Disconnect switch2 = Terminal block3 = Dual point power (2 blocks)

12 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Digit 25— Industrial Options

A = Protective coating evaporator coilB = Silver solderC = Stainless steel screwsD = A and BE = A and CF = B and CG = A, B, and C0 = none

Digit 26— Drain PanType

A = Galvanized slopedB = Stainless steel sloped

Digit 27—Waterside Economizer

A =Mechanical clean full capacity (4-row)B =Mechanical clean low capacity (2-row)C = Chemical clean full capacity (4-row)D = Chemical clean low capacity (2-row)0 = None

Digit 28— Ventilation Control

B = Airside econ w/Traq damper, top O/AC = Airside econ w/ std damper, top O/AE = Airside econ w/Traq damper &comparative enthalpy, top O/AF = Airside econ w/ std damper &comparative enthalpy, top O/AH = 2-position damper ventilation interfaceJ = Airside economizer interfaceK = Airside economizer interface w/comparative enthalpy

Digit 29—Water Piping

D = Left hand basic pipingF = Left hand Intermediate pipingK = Left hand basic w/ flow switchM = Left hand intermediate w/ flow switch0 = None

Digit 30— Condenser Tube Type

A = Standard condenser tubesB = 90/10 CuNi condenser tubes0 = None (air-cooled only)

Digit 31— Compressor Service Valves

1 =With service valves0 = None

Digit 32—Miscellaneous SystemControl1 = Time clock2 = Interface for remote HI (IPCB)3 = Dirty filter switch4 = 1 and 25 = 1 and 36 = 2 and 37 = 1, 2 and 30 = None

Digit 33 — Control Interface Options

A = Generic BAS Module; 0-5 VDC (GBAS)B = Ventilation Override Module (VOM)D = Remote Human Interface (RHI)G = GBAS and VOMH= GBAS and RHIJ = VOM and RHIM = GBAS, VOM, and RHIN = BACnet Communications Interface (BCI)P = BCI and GBASQ = BCI and VOMR = BCI and RHIT= BCI and GBAS and VOMU= BCI and GBAS and RHIV= BCI and VOM and RHIW = BCI and GBAS and VOM and RHI0 = None1 = Lontalk Comm5 Interface (LCI)2 = LCI and GBAS3 = LCI and VOM4 = LCI and RHI5 = LCI and GBAS and VOM6 = LCI and GBAS and RHI7 = LCI and VOM and RHI8 = LCI and GBAS and VOM and RHI

Digit 34— Agency

U= UL agency listing0 = None

Digit 35— Filter Type

1 = 2” T/A w/ 2” rack2 = 2” med. eff. T/A w/ 2” rack3 = 4” bolt-on rack w/ 2” med eff. filter4 = 6” rack w/ 2” construction T/A pre-filter &4” filter space5 = 6” rack w/ 2” med. eff. T/A pre-filter & 4”filter space

Digit 36—Miscellaneous ControlOptionA = Low entering air temp. protect device(LEATPD)B = High duct temp t-stat, ship separateC= Plenum high static switch, ship separateE= A and BF= A and CH= B and CL = A, B, and C0 = None

MMooddeell NNuummbbeerr DDeessccrriippttiioonn

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 13

Commercial Self-Contained Air-Cooled Condenser

Digit 1 — Unit Model

C = Condenser

Digit 2 — Unit Type

C = CommercialI = Industrial

Digit 3 — Condenser Medium

R = Remote

Digit 4 — Development Sequence

C = C

Digit 5, 6, 7 — Nominal Capacity

020 = 20 Tons029 = 29 Tons035 = 35 Tons040 = 40 Tons050 = 50 Tons060 = 60 Tons

Digit 8 — Unit Voltage

4 = 460 Volt/60 Hz/3 ph5 = 575 Volt/60 Hz/3 ph6 = 200 Volt/60 Hz/3 ph

Digit 9 — Control Option

0 = No Low Ambient, IPakA = No Low Ambient, T-Stat*B = Low Ambient, IPakC = Low Ambient, T-Stat*

Note: *T-Stat only available on SCRG.

Digit 10, 11—Design Sequence

** = Factory Assigned

Digit 12— Unit Finish

1 = Paint — Slate Gray

Digit 13— Coil Options

A = Non-Coated AluminumC = Protective Coating Aluminum


0 = NoneA = Spring IsolatorsB = Isopads

Digit 15— Panels

1 = Louvered Panels

Digit 16— Agency

0 = NoneU =With UL Listing

MMooddeell NNuummbbeerr DDeessccrriippttiioonn

14 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

General Data

Table 1. SCWF/SIWF Water-cooled self-contained, 20 to 42 tons

Unit Size 20 22 25 29 32 35 38 42

Compressor Data

Quantity 2 2 2 1/1 1/1 3 3 2/1

Nominal Ton/comp 10 10 10 15/10 15/10 10 10 10/15

Evaporator CoilData

Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3

Rows 2 2 3 or 6 2 4 or 6 3 4 or 6 3

Sq. Ft. 21.81 21.81 21.81 29.98 29.98 31.35 31.35 38.57

Fpf 144 144 144 144 144 144 144 144

Condenser Data

Minimum Gpm w/oEcon 36 36 36 46 46 54 54 64

Minimum Gpmw/Econ 41 41 41 60 60 65 65 64

Maximum Gpm 80 80 80 102 102 119 119 142

Evaporator FanData

Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Diameter 18" 18" 18" 18" 18" 20" 20" 25"

Minimum Hp 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 7. 5

Minimum Kw (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (5.39)

Maximum Hp 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 30

Maximum Kw (14.91) (14.91) (14.91) (18.64) (18.64) (18.64) (18.64) (22.37)

Minimum Design Cfm 6325 6325 6500 8700 8700 9100 9880 11200

Maximum Design Cfm 8500 9350 10625 12325 13600 14875 16150 17850

High CapacityOption

Rows N/A N/A 6 N/A 6 N/A 6 N/A

Optional Low FlowFan 6

Diameter N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 18” N/A

Min/max Design Cfm N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 6000/10625 N/A

Refrigerant Charge,lbs. R-410A(Standard

Capacity/HighCapacity)

Circuit A 19.5 19.5 21.5 24.7 28.5/29.3 21.5 23.5/26.5 22.0

Circuit B 19.5 19.5 21.5 20.5 23.5/23.5 21.5 23.5/26.5 22.0

Circuit C N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 21.5 23.5/26.5 22.0

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 15

Table 1. SCWF/SIWF Water-cooled self-contained, 20 to 42 tons (continued)

Unit Size 20 22 25 29 32 35 38 42

Capacity Steps - % 100/53/0 100/53/0 100/53/0 100/62/39/0

100/59/39/0

100/65/31/0

100/65/30/0

100/71/43/26/0

Notes:1. Compressors are Trane 3-D™ scroll.2. All units operate with R-410A. Units ships with full operating charge.3. Maximum cfm limits are set to prevent moisture carryover on the evaporator coil.4. Minimum cfm limits are set to ensure stable thermal expansion valve operation at low load conditions.5. Optional low flow fan (unit model number digit 23 = 1) is available ONLY when High Capacity option is selected (unit model number digit 5 = V).

Table 2. SCWF/SIWF Water-cooled self-contained, 46-110 tons

Unit Size 46 52 58 65 72 80 90 100 110

CompressorData

Quantity 2/1 3 3 3/1 3/1 4 5 2/4 6

Nominal Ton/Comp 10/15 15 15 15/10 15/10 15 15 10/15 15

Circuits 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 6

Evaporator CoilData

Rows 4 or 6 2 4 or 6 3 4 or 6 6 6 or 8 6 or 8 6 or 8

Sq. Ft. 38.57 49.09 49.09 49.09 49.09 49.09 56.81 56.81 56.81

FPF 144 144 144 144 144 144 144 144 144

Condenser Data

Min GPM w/o Econ 64 84 84 102 102 112 140 168 168

Min GPM w/ Econ 64 84 84 102 102 112 N/A N/A N/A

Maximum GPM 142 186 186 226 226 248 300 350 350

Evaporator FanData

Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Size (Dia.) 25" 25" 25" 27.5" 27.5" 27.5" 27.5" 27.5" 27.5"

Minimum HP 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 15 15 15

Minimum kW (5.59) (5.59) (5.59) (7.46) (7.46) (7.46) (11.19) (11.19) (11.19)

Maximum HP 30 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 60

Maximum kW (22.37) (29.84) (29.84) (37.29) (37.29) (37.29) (44.74) (44.74) (44.74)

Min Design CFM 11960 14250 15080 16900 18700 20800 17500 17500 17500

Max Design CFM 19550 22100 24650 27625 29800 29800 35000 35000 35000

High CapacityOption

Rows 6 N/A 6 N/A 6 N/A 8 8 8

Optional LowFlow Fan

Size (Dia.) 18" N/A 18" N/A 20" N/A N/A N/A N/A

Min./Max DesignCFM 7700/13600 N/A 8900/

13600 N/A 10700/16150 N/A N/A N/A N/A

GGeenneerraall DDaattaa

16 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Table 2. SCWF/SIWF Water-cooled self-contained, 46-110 tons (continued)

Unit Size 46 52 58 65 72 80 90 100 110

RefrigerantCharge — lbs. R-410A (StandardCapacity/HighCapacity)

Circuit A 24.5/28.5 21.0 26.5/31.5 22.0 24.5 28.0 24.5 24.5 24.5

Circuit B 24.5/28.5 21.0 26.5/31.5 22.0 24.5 28.0 24.5 24.5 24.5

Circuit C 24.5/28.5 21.0 26.5/31.5 22.0 24.5 28.0 24.5 24.5 24.5

Circuit D N/A N/A N/A 21.0 22.0 28.0 24.5 24.5 24.5

Circuit E N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 24.5 24.5 24.5

Circuit F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 24.5 24.5

Capacity Steps - % 100/70/41/30/0

100/65/32/0

100/65/30/0

100/71/44/24/0

100/71/43/23/0

100/73/46/20/0

100/80/40/20/0

100/75/38/19/0

100/66/33/17/0

Notes:1. Compressors are Trane 3-D™ scroll.2. All units operate with R-410A. Units ships with full operating charge.3. Maximum cfm limits are set to prevent moisture carryover on the evaporator coil.4. Minimum cfm limits are set to ensure stable thermal expansion valve operation at low load conditions.

Table 3. SCRF/SIRF Air-cooled self-contained

Unit Size 25 29 30 35 40 50 60

Compressor Data

Quantity 1/1 1/1 3 3 2/1 3 4

Nominal Ton/Comp 15/10 15/10 10 10 10/15 15 15

Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Evaporator Coil Data

Rows 4 4 3 4 4 4 6

Sq. Ft. 29.98 29.98 31.35 31.35 38.57 49.09 49.09

FPF 144 144 120 144 144 144 144

Evaporator Fan Data

Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Size (Dia.) 18" 18" 20" 20" 25" 25" 27.5"

Minimum HP 5 5 5 5 7.5 7.5 10

Minimum kW (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (5.59) (5.59) (7.46)

Maximum HP 20 20 25 25 30 40 50

Maximum kW (18.64) (18.64) (18.64) (18.64) (22.37) (29.84) (37.29)

Minimum Design CFM 8700 8700 9100 9880 11960 15080 20800

Maximum Design CFM 12325 13600 14875 16150 19550 24650 29800

Refrigerant Charge See Note 2 below

Capacity Steps - % 100/62/39/0 100/59/39/0 100/65/31/0 100/65/30/0 100/70/41/30/0 100/65/30/0 100/73/46/

20/0


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 17

Table 3. SCRF/SIRF Air-cooled self-contained (continued)

Unit Size 25 29 30 35 40 50 60

CCRC/CIRC Unit Match 29 29 35 35 40 50 60

Notes:1. Compressors are Trane 3-D™ scroll.2. All units operate with R-410A. Units ship with a dry nitrogen holding charge. Field refrigerant system charge required. Refer to Table 4, p. 17 for

amounts required.3. Maximum cfm limits are set to prevent moisture carryover on the evaporator coil.4. Minimum cfm limits are set to ensure stable thermal expansion valve operation at low load conditions.

Table 4. SCRF/SIRF Air–cooled self–contained and CCRC/CIRC remote air-cooled condenser refrigerant data

SCRF/SIRF & CCRC/CIRCUnitSize

25/29 29/29 30/35 35/35 40/40 50/50 60/60

No. of Refrigerant Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Operating Charge - lbs. R-410A 56.2/38.0 56.2/38.0 71/35.5 75/37.5 86.5/39.5 100/52 101.5/101.5

Operating Charge - kg R-410A 23.1/17 23.1/17 32.2/16.1 34/17 39.2/17.9 44.5/22.7 46/46

Cond. Storage Cap. - lbs. R-410A 51/37 51/37 74/37 74/37 74/51 102/51 102/102

Cond. Storage Cap. - kg R-410A 23.1/16.8 23.1/16.8 33.6/16.8 33.6/16.8 33.6/23.1 46.3/23.1 46.3/46.3

Notes:1. Refrigerant charges are listed as circuit 1 circuit 2 and provide only an estimate. Final charge requires sound field charging practice.2. Operating charge is for entire system, which includes the air–cooled self–contained, remote air–cooled condenser, and 25 feet of interconnecting

refrigerant piping.3. At conditions of 95° F (35° C), condenser storage capacity is 95% full.4. To determine the correct amount of refrigerant needed for a particular application, reference the Trane Reciprocating Refrigeration Manual.

Table 5. SCWF/SIWF water volumes

Unit Size

Water Volume in U.S. Gallons / Liters

W/o Economizer With Mech. Cleanable Econ With Chem. Cleanable Econ

Gallons Liters Gallons Liters Gallons Liters

20 9.0 34.1 17.4 65.9 16.9 64.0

22 9.0 34.1 17.4 65.9 16.9 64.0

25 9.0 34.1 17.4 65.9 16.9 64.0

29 9.0 34.1 20.5 77.6 18.8 71.2

32 9.0 34.1 20.5 77.6 18.8 71.2

35 10.0 37.9 21.9 82.9 20.2 76.5

38 10.0 37.9 21.9 82.9 20.2 76.5

42 15.0 56.8 32.2 121.9 31.4 118.9

46 15.0 56.8 32.2 121.9 31.4 118.9

52 15.0 56.8 36.9 139.7 35.9 135.9

58 15.0 56.8 36.9 139.7 35.9 135.9

65 16.0 60.6 37.9 143.5 36.9 139.7

72 16.0 60.6 37.9 143.5 36.9 139.7

80 16.0 60.6 37.9 143.5 36.9 139.7

90 22.5 85.2 50.1 189.6 N/A N/A

100 23.0 87.1 50.6 191.5 N/A N/A

110 24.0 90.8 51.6 195.3 N/A N/A


18 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Table 6. SCWF/SIWF Refrigerant circuits, number of compressors by circuit

Circuit

Unit Size 1 2 3 4 5 6

20/22/25 Ton 1- 10T 1- 10T N/A N/A N/A N/A

29/32 Ton 1- 15T 1- 10T N/A N/A N/A N/A

35/38 Ton 1- 10T 1- 10T 1- 10T N/A N/A N/A

42/46 Ton 1- 15T 1- 10T 1- 10T N/A N/A N/A

52/58 Ton 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T N/A N/A N/A

60/72 Ton 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 10T N/A N/A

80 Ton 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T N/A N/A

90 Ton 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T

100 Ton 1-15T 1-15T 1-15T 1-15T 1-10T 1-10T

110 Ton 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T

Note: This table depicts compressor location in unit, plan view from left corner.

Table 7. SCRF/SIRF Refrigerant circuits, number of compressors by circuit

Circuit

Unit Size 1 2

25/29 Ton 1-15T 1-10T

30/35 Ton 2-10T 1-10T

40 Ton 1-10T, 1-15T 1-10T

50 Ton 2-15T 1-15T

60 Ton 2-15T 2-15T

Note: This table depicts compressor location in unit, plan view from left corner.

Table 8. Filter data, water-cooled units models SCWF & SIWF

Unit Size 20- 38 tons 40-85 tons 90-110 tons

Number - Size (In.)8 - 20 x 18 12 - 25 x 20 15 - 24 x 24

4 - 20 x 20 6 - 20 x 20 3 - 24 x 12

UnitsWith HotWater Or Steam

Number - Size (In.)

4 - 16 x 20 4 - 25 x 20

n/a4 - 20 x 20 2 - 20 x 20

4 - 18 x 20 8 - 25 x 16

4 - 20 x 16

Table 9. Filter data, air-cooled units models SCRF & SIRF

Unit size 20- 35 tons 40-60 tons

Number - Size (in.)8 - 20 x 18 12 - 25 x 20

4 - 20 x 20 6 - 20 x 20

Units With Hot Water Or Steam


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 19

Table 9. Filter data, air-cooled units models SCRF & SIRF (continued)

Unit size 20- 35 tons 40-60 tons

Number - Size (in.)

4 - 16 x 20 4 - 25 x 20

4 - 20 x 20 2 - 20 x 20

4 - 18 x 20 8 - 25 x 16

N/A 4 - 20 x 16

Table 10. Self-contained heating coil

Unit Size SCWF 20 - 38 SCWF 42 - 80 SCRF 20 - 35 SCRF 40 - 60

Steam Coil

Coil Type NS NS NS NS

Rows 1 1 1 1

No./Size (inches) (2) 24 x 58 (2) 30 x 81 (2) 24 x 58) (2) 30 x 81

No./Size (mm) (2) 609.6 x 1473.2 (2) 762 x 2057.4 (2) 609.6 x 1473.2 (2) 762 x 2057.4

FPF 42 42 42 42

HotWater Coil

Coil Type 5W 5W 5W 5W

Rows 1 or 2 N/A N/A N/A

No./Size (inches) (2) 24 x 58 (2) 30 x 81 (2) 24 x 58 (2) 30 x8 1

No./Size (mm) (2) 609.6 x 1473.2 (2) 762 x 2057.4 (2) 609.6 x 1473.2 (2) 762 x 2057.4

FPF 80 or 108 80 or 108 80 or 108 80 or 108

Notes:1. Hot water and steam heating coils have Prima-Flo® fins without turbulators.2. For coil capacities, use TOPSS™ (Trane Official Product Selection Program).3. Full capacity coils consist of two coils stacked and piped in parallel.

Table 11. Waterside economizer coil physical data

Model Unit Size Type Rows FPFHeight(in)

Length(in)

SCXF 20, 22 & 25 Chemically Cleanable 2 108 40 78.5

SCXF 20, 22 & 25 Mechanical Cleanable 2 108 40 78.5

SCXF 20, 22 & 25 Chemically Cleanable 4 108 40 78.5


SCXF 29 & 32 Chemically Cleanable 2 108 55 78.5

SCXF 29 & 32 Mechanical Cleanable 2 108 55 78.5

SCXF 29 & 32 Mechanical Cleanable 4 108 55 78.5

SCXF 29 & 32 Chemically Cleanable 4 108 55 78.5

SCXF 35 & 38 Chemically Cleanable 2 108 57.5 78.5

SCXF 35 & 38 Mechanical Cleanable 2 108 57.5 78.5

SCXF 35 & 38 Chemically Cleanable 4 108 57.5 78.5

SCXF 35 & 38 Mechanical Cleanable 4 108 57.5 78.5

SCXF 42 & 46 Chemically Cleanable 2 144 55 101


20 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Table 11. Waterside economizer coil physical data (continued)

Model Unit Size Type Rows FPFHeight(in)

Length(in)

SCXF 42 & 46 Mechanical Cleanable 2 144 70 101

SCXF 42 & 46 Chemically Cleanable 4 144 55 101

SCXF 42 & 46 Mechanical Cleanable 4 144 70 101

SCXF 52, 58, 65, 72, 80, 85 Chemically Cleanable 2 144 70 101

SCXF 52, 58, 65, 72, 80, 85 Mechanical Cleanable 2 144 70 101

SCXF 52, 58, 65, 72, 80, 85 Chemically Cleanable 4 144 70 101

SCXF 52, 58, 65, 72, 80, 85 Mechanical Cleanable 4 144 70 101



SCXF-SVX01R-EN 21

Pre-InstallationReceivingReceiving ChecklistComplete the following checklist immediately afterreceiving unit shipment to detect possible shippingdamage:

• Inspect individual cartons before accepting. Checkfor rattles, bent carton corners, or other visibleindications of shipping damage.

• If a unit appears damaged, inspect it immediatelybefore accepting the shipment. Make specificnotations concerning the damage on the freight bill.Do not refuse delivery.

• Inspect the unit for concealed damage before it isstored and as soon as possible after delivery.Report concealed damage to the freight line withinthe allotted time after delivery. Check with thecarrier for their allotted time to submit a claim.

• Do not move damaged material from the receivinglocation. It is the receiver’s responsibility to providereasonable evidence that concealed damage didnot occur after delivery.

• Do not continue unpacking the shipment if itappears damaged. Retain all internal packing,cartons, and crate. Take photos of damagedmaterial if possible.

• Notify the carrier of the damage immediately byphone and mail. Request an immediate jointinspection of the damage by the carrier andconsignee.

NNoottee:: Notify your Trane representative of the damageand arrange for repair. Have the carrier inspectthe damage before making any repairs to theunit.

Ship-Separate AccessoriesField-installed sensors ship separately inside maincontrol panel of the unit. Extra filters, sheaves, andbelts ship in the fan motor section of the unit.Condenser plugs, spring isolators, and Iso-pads shipstored in the bottom left side of the unit.

Contractor Installation ResponsibilitiesComplete the following checklist before beginning finalunit installation:

• Verify the unit size and tagging with the unitnameplate.

• Make certain the floor or foundation is level, solid,and sufficient to support the unit and accessoryweights. Level or repair the floor before positioningthe unit if necessary.

• Allow minimum recommended clearances forroutine maintenance and service. Allow space at

end of the unit for shaft removal and servicing.Refer to the unit submittals for dimensions. Seealso the “Service Clearances” section in theDimensional Data chapter.

• Allow three fan diameters above the unit for thedischarge ductwork. Return air enters the rear ofthe unit and conditioned supply air dischargesthrough the top.

• Electrical connection knockouts are on the top, leftside of the unit.

• Allow adequate space for piping access and panelremoval. Condenser water piping, refrigerantpiping, and condensate drain connections are onthe lower left end panel.

NNoottee:: Unit height and connection locations willchange if using vibration isolators. The unitheight may increase up to 5-7/8” with springtype isolators.

• Electrical supply power must meet specific balanceand voltage requirements as described in chapter“Electrical Installation”.

• Water-cooled units only: The installer is responsiblefor providing a condenser main, standby waterpump, cooling tower, pressure gauges, strainers,and all components for waterside piping. See“Water Piping,” p. 38 for general watersiderecommendations.

• Air-cooled units only: The installer is responsiblefor providing and installing the remote air-cooledcondenser and refrigerant piping.

Unit InspectionTo protect against loss due to damage incurred intransit, perform inspection immediately upon receipt ofthe unit.

Exterior InspectionIf the job site inspection reveals damage or materialshortages, file a claim with the carrier immediately.Specify the type and extent of the damage on the bill oflading before signing. Notify the appropriate salesrepresentative.

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: Do not proceed with installation of adamaged unit without salesrepresentative’s approval.

• Visually inspect the complete exterior for signs ofshipping damages to unit or packing material.

• Verify that the nameplate data matches the salesorder and bill of lading.

• Verify that the unit is properly equipped and thereare no material shortages.

• Verify that the power supply complies with the unitnameplate specifications.

22 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Inspection for Concealed DamageVisually inspect the components for concealed damageas soon as possible after delivery and before it isstored.

If concealed damage is discovered:

• Notify the carrier’s terminal of the damageimmediately by phone and by mail.

• Concealed damage must be reported within 15days.

• Request an immediate, joint inspection of thedamage with the carrier and consignee.

• Stop unpacking the unit.

• Do not remove damaged material from receivinglocation.

• Take photos of the damage, if possible.

• The owner must provide reasonable evidence thatthe damage did not occur after delivery.

RepairNotify the appropriate sales representative beforearranging unit installation or repair.

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: Do not repair unit until the damage hasbeen inspected by the carrier’srepresentative.

UnpackingCommercial self-contained units ship assembled withprotective coverings over the coil and dischargeopenings.Figure 3, p. 22 illustrates a typical shippingpackage.

Figure 3. Typical unit shipping package

Shipping Cover

PPrree--IInnssttaallllaattiioonn

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 23

Unit Protective CoversRemove shipping protection coverings from humaninterface panel (HI) at control panel, filter box (or airinlet opening), discharge air opening, and optionalvariable frequency drive (VFD).

Supply Fan IsolatorsRemove the shipping channels and four fan mountingbolts from beneath the fan. Open both fancompartment doors to access the channels.

NNootteess::

• There are six fan mounting points for 40-110ton units.

• The 20 to 38 ton units use neopreneisolators, and 40 to 110 ton units use springisolators.

Figure 4. Fan Assembly Shipping Spacer Locations

PPrree--IInnssttaallllaattiioonn

24 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Dimensional DataFigure 5. 20 to 38 ton self-contained

NNootteess::

1. All unit weights include refrigerant, water, controllers, electric heat and valves.

2. Add 150 lbs. to total weight to obtain approximate shipping weight.

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 25

Figure 6. 42 to 80 ton self-contained

NNootteess::

1. All unit weights include refrigerant, water, controllers, electric heat and valves.

2. Add 150 lbs. to total weight to obtain approximate shipping weight.

DDiimmeennssiioonnaall DDaattaa

26 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Figure 7. 90 to 110 ton self-contained: front view

Ext. Height

Std. Height

Low Height

43.50"

27.75"19.625"

HumanInterface

89.50"Unit Control

Box

140.00"

VFD/Interface

Plenum (low, standard,and extended height shown)

Figure 8. 90 to 110 ton self-contained: top view (isolator mounting locations shown)

72.00"

3.50"

133.00"

69.75"

3.50" Filter Rack

**

*

*

**

Isolator Mounting Location (x6)on bottom of unit

80.50”

86.25”


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 27

Figure 9. Detail A: electrical connections 20 to 110 tons

40 3/8” (20-38 Ton)

PLUGS

PLUGS

Table 12. Discharge dimensions (in.)

Unit Model Fan Size A B C DStandard Fan

SCWF 20-25 18” 31.85 23.5 23.11 20.4SCWF 29-32SCRF 25-29 18” 31.85 23.5 23.11 20.4

SCWF 35-38SCRF 30-35 20” 30.5 26.2 21.25 25.75

SCWF 42-58SCRF 40-50 25” 43.75 33 31.5 31.5

SCWF 65-80SCRF 60 27.5” 43.5 33.5 28.63 34.5

SCWF 90-110 27.5” 50.7 33.5 28.8 34.5

Low Flow Fan Option

SCWF 38 18” 44.8 23.25 36.78 19

SCWF 46 18” 44.8 23.25 36.78 19

SCWF 58 18” 44.8 23.25 36.78 20.4

SCWF 72 20” 43.4 26.2 34.77 24.6


28 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Steam and Hot Water CoilsSteam CoilsFigure 10. Steam Coil

Main Control Panel

Vacuum Trap Connection

Condensate Return

Vacuum Trap ConnectionSteam Inlet Connection

Condensate ReturnAir Inlet

LK F

NM

H

J

A

CB

Table 13. Piping locations for steam coils (in)(lbs)

Unit Size A B C D E F G H J K L M N Weight

20-38 Ton 60-3/8 82-7/8 18 — — 22-3/8 — — 18-1/2 3-7/8 5 4-3/8 1-1/4 460

42-80 Ton 72-7/8 105-1/4 18 — — 13-1/4 — — 22-1/8 6-3/8 5-375 4-3/8 1-1/4 600Note: Weight includes complete heating coil box.

Hot Water CoilsFigure 11. Hot Water Coil

Notes:1. All coils are factory mounted, piped, and wired.2. All piping connections are 1-1/2” (38.1mm) female NPT fittings.

Main Control Panel

Air Inlet

Hot Water Outlet Connection

Hot Water Inlet Connection

HF

G

A

B

E

D

C

Table 14. Hot water coil piping locations & weight (in)(lbs)

Unit Size A B C D E F G H Weight

20-38 Ton 60 3/8 82 7/8 18 20 5/8 8 1/8 22 3/8 3 5/8 8 1/4 460

42-80 Ton 72 7/8 105 1/4 18 24 1/2 10 3/4 13 1/4 3 5/8 8 1/4 600Note: Weight includes complete heating coil box.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 29

Plenum

B

CA

Table 15. Plenum dimensions (in)(lbs)

Unit Model A B C Weight

20-38 Ton

low 64-7/8 24-5/8 95-7/8 325

std. 64-7/8 32-3/8 95-7/8 430

ext. 64-7/8 45 95-7/8 705

42-80 Ton

low 80-3/8 21-1/8 119-7/8 390

std. 80-3/8 28-5/8 119-7/8 540

ext. 80-3/8 45 119-7/8 705

90-110 Ton

low 80-1/2 19-5/8 140 430

std. 80-1/2 27-3/4 140 595

ext. 80-1/2 43-1/2 140 795

FiltersFigure 12. Six-inch filter rack

Table 16. Six-inch filter rack weight, lbs.

Unit Size Weight

20-38 212

42-80 257


30 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Airside EconomizerFigure 13. Airside economizer

Table 17. Airside economizer sizes and dimensions (in.)

Size A B C D E F (1) F (2) G (1) G (2)

SXWF 20 44 74 22-3/8 81-3/4 8-3/4 66-3/4 49-3/4 23-1/4 20-1/2

SXRF 25 44 74 22-3/8 81-3/4 8-3/4 68-5/8 49-3/4 28-1/8 20-1/2

SXWF 22 44 74 22-3/8 81-3/4 8-3/4 68-5/8 49-3/4 28-1/8 20-1/2

SXRF 29 44 74 22-3/8 81-3/4 8-3/4 74-1/4 62-3/4 23-1/4 20-1/2

SXWF 32 44 74 22-3/8 81-3/4 8-3/4 74-1/4 62-3/4 23-1/4 20-1/2

SXRF 30-35 44 74 22-3/8 81-3/4 8-3/4 73-1/2 62-3/4 33 20-1/2

SXWF 35-38 44 74 22-3/8 81-3/4 8-3/4 73-1/2 62-3/4 33 20-1/2

SXWF 42 57-3/8 86-1/2 13-1/4 104-3/8 8-7/8 83-5/8 63-1/2 33 26

SXRF 40 57-3/8 86-1/2 13-1/4 104-3/8 8-7/8 94-1/8 63-1/2 28-1/8 26

SXWF 46 57-3/8 86-1/2 13-1/4 104-3/8 8-7/8 94-1/8 63-1/2 28-1/8 26

SXRF 50 57-3/8 86-1/2 13-1/4 104-3/8 8-7/8 96-5/8 63-1/2 52 37-1/2

SXRF 60 57-3/8 86-1/2 13-1/4 104-3/8 8-7/8 96-5/8 63-1/2 52 37-1/2

SXRF 52-58 57-3/8 86-1/2 13-1/4 104-3/8 8-7/8 96-5/8 63-1/2 52 37-1/2

SXWF 65-80 57-3/8 86-1/2 13-1/4 104-3/8 8-7/8 96-5/8 63-1/2 52 37-1/2

Size H (1) H (2) J K L M Weight

SXWF 20 9-3/4 11-1/8 20-1/2 22-1/4 16 49-3/4 430

SXRF 25 7-1/4 11-1/8 20-1/2 22-1/4 16 49-3/4 500

SXWF 22 7-1/4 11-1/8 20-1/2 22-1/4 16 49-3/4 500

SXRF 29 9-3/4 11-1/8 20-1/2 22-1/4 9-1/2 62-3/4 500

SXWF 32 9-3/4 11-1/8 20-1/2 22-1/4 9-1/2 62-3/4 500

SXRF 30-35 4-7/8 11-1/8 20-1/2 22-1/4 9-1/2 62-3/4 500

SXWF 35-38 4-7/8 11-1/8 20-1/2 22-1/4 9-1/2 62-3/4 500


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 31

Table 17. Airside economizer sizes and dimensions (in.) (continued)

Size H (1) H (2) J K L M Weight

SXWF 42 2-1/2 15 26 24-3/4 20-3/8 63-1/2 640

SXRF 40 6-7/8 15 26 24-3/4 20-3/8 63-1/2 640

SXWF 46 6-7/8 15 26 24-3/4 20-3/8 63-1/2 640

SXRF 50 1-7/8 9-1/4 37-1/2 19 20-3/8 63-1/2 700

SXRF 60 1-7/8 9-1/4 37-1/2 19 20-3/8 63-1/2 700

SXRF 52-58 1-7/8 9-1/4 37-1/2 19 20-3/8 63-1/2 700

SXWF 65-80 1-7/8 9-1/4 37-1/2 19 20-3/8 63-1/2 800

Service ClearancesSee figure and table below for recommended serviceand code clearances.

Figure 14. Top view of self-contained unit showingrecommended service and code clearances(a)

Air Inlet

See Table

42” (1066.8mm) (20-38 Ton)Minimum

48” (1219mm) (42-110 Ton)

ControlPanel

36” (914.4mm)Minimum

Left side

Front

Right side

NNoottee:: (a) See for right side clearance values for variousunit configurations.

Table 18. Service and code clearance requirements

Side Distance—inches (mm) Purpose

Front42 (1066) (20 to 38 tons) NEC code requirements

48 (1219) (42 to 110 tons) Fan service/removal

Left 36 (914) Filter, refrigeration, and waterside components

Right

9 (229) Non VFD w/open return

18 (457) Non VFD w/ducted return

9 (229) 20 to 80 tons, w/VFD 7.5 to 50 hp

36 (914) 90 to 110 tons (motor, condensers, and refrigeration)

Inlet18 (457) (20 to 80 tons) Provides uniform airflow

36 (914) (90 to 110 tons) Provides uniform airflow


32 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Weights

Table 19. Unit weights — SCWF/SCRF/SIWF/SIRF

Unit UnitSize

BaseWeightlbs. (kg)

AirsideEconomizerlbs. (kg)

2-RowWatersideEconomizerlbs. (kg)

4-RowWatersideEconomizerlbs. (kg)

HeatingCoil Boxlbs. (kg)

6-RowEvap. Coillbs. (kg)

6-inch filterrack lbs.(kg)

SCWF/SIWF

20 3102 (1407) 430 (195) 140 (64) 340 (154) 460 (209) N/A 212 (96)

22 3102 (1407) 430 (195) 140 (64) 340 (154) 460 (209) N/A 212 (96)

25 3170 (1438) 430 (195) 140 (64) 340 (154) 460 (209) 144 (65) 212 (96)

29 3326 (1508) 500 (227) 190 (86) 390 (177) 460 (209) N/A 212 (96)

32 3514 (1594) 500 (227) 190 (86) 390 (177) 460 (209) 132 (60) 212 (96)

35 3721 (1688) 500 (227) 280 (127) 505 (229) 460 (209) N/A 212 (96)

38 3819 (1732) 500 (227) 280 (127) 505 (229) 460 (209) 138 (63) 212 (96)

42 4615 (2093) 640 (290) 255 (116) 505 (229) 600 (272) N/A 257 (117)

46 4705 (2134) 640 (290) 255 (116) 505 (229) 600 (272) 170 (77) 257 (117)

52 4892 (2219) 700 (318) 335 (152) 665 (302) 600 (272) N/A 257 (117)

58 5142 (2332) 700 (318) 335 (152) 665 (302) 600 (272) 216 (98) 257 (117)

65 5371 (2436) 800 (363) 335 (152) 665 (302) 600 (272) N/A 257 (117)

72 5491 (2490) 800 (363) 335 (152) 665 (302) 600 (272) 216 (98) 257 (117)

80 5814 (2637) 800 (363) 335 (152) 665 (302) 600 (272) N/A 257 (117)

90 6330 (2871) N/A N/A 1015 (460) N/A 255 (116) N/A

100 6840 (3103) N/A N/A 1015 (460) N/A 255 (116) N/A

110 6852 (3108) N/A N/A 1015 (460) N/A 255 (116) N/A

SCRF/SIRF

25 3231 (1465) 500 (227) N/A N/A 460 (209) N/A N/A

29 3231 (1465) 500 (227) N/A N/A 460 (209) N/A N/A

30 3321 (1506) 500 (227) N/A N/A 460 (209) N/A N/A

35 3421 (1552) 500 (227) N/A N/A 460 (209) N/A N/A

40 4294 (1948) 640 (290) N/A N/A 600 (272) N/A N/A

50 4731 (2146) 700 (318) N/A N/A 600 (272) N/A N/A

60 5288 (2399) 800 (363) N/A N/A 600 (272) N/A N/A

Notes:1. All unit weights include refrigerant, water, and controllers, electric heat and valves.2. Add 150 lbs. to total weight to obtain approximate shipping weight.3. Flexible horizontal discharge plenum option weights: 45-inch plenum = 705 lbs., Standard height plenum = 430 lbs., Low height plenum = 325 lbs.

Table 20. Unit weights — CCRC/CIRC

Unit Size ShippingWeight lbs (kg). OperatingWeight lbs.(kg)

CCRC/CIRC 20 2030 (920) 1906 (865)

CCRC/CIRC 29 2084 (945) 1960 (890)

CCRC/CIRC 32 2138 (970) 2014 (915)

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 33

Table 20. Unit weights — CCRC/CIRC (continued)

Unit Size ShippingWeight lbs (kg). OperatingWeight lbs.(kg)

CCRC/CIRC 35 3018 (1370) 2833 (1285)

CCRC/CIRC 40 3072 (1395) 2887 (1310)

CCRC/CIRC 50 3995 (1810) 3695 (1675)

CCRC/CIRC 60 4275 (1940) 3975 (1805)

Table 21. VFD weights

Without Bypass With Bypass

HP200V 460V 575V

HP200V 460V 575V

LBS Kg LBS Kg LBS Kg LBS Kg LBS Kg LBS Kg

7.5 126 57.153 114 51.710 114 51.710 7.5 215 97.522 170 77.111 170 77.111

10 126 57.153 114 51.710 126 57.153 10 215 97.522 215 97.522 215 97.522

15 152 68.946 126 57.153 126 57.153 15 220 99.790 215 97.522 215 97.522

20 152 68.946 126 57.153 126 57.153 20 220 99.790 215 97.522 215 97.522

25 152 68.946 126 57.153 126 57.153 25 250 113.398 215 97.522 215 97.522

30 177 80.286 152 68.946 152 68.946 30 250 113.398 220 99.790 220 99.790

40 177 80.286 152 68.946 152 68.946 40 290 131.542 220 99.790 220 99.790

50 NA NA 152 68.946 152 68.946 50 NA NA 250 113.398 250 113.398

60 NA NA 177 80.286 NA NA 60 NA NA 250 113.398 NA NA

Note: Weights include swing-out door.

WWeeiigghhttss

34 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Installation - MechanicalUnit Handling

WWAARRNNIINNGGIImmpprrooppeerr UUnniitt LLiifftt!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo pprrooppeerrllyy lliifftt uunniitt iinn aa LLEEVVEELL ppoossiittiioonnccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn uunniitt ddrrooppppiinngg aanndd ppoossssiibbllyyccrruusshhiinngg ooppeerraattoorr//tteecchhnniicciiaann wwhhiicchh ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy,, aanndd eeqquuiippmmeenntt oorrpprrooppeerrttyy--oonnllyy ddaammaaggee..TTeesstt lliifftt uunniitt aapppprrooxxiimmaatteellyy 2244 iinncchheess ((6611 ccmm)) ttoovveerriiffyy pprrooppeerr cceenntteerr ooff ggrraavviittyy lliifftt ppooiinntt.. TToo aavvooiiddddrrooppppiinngg ooff uunniitt,, rreeppoossiittiioonn lliiffttiinngg ppooiinntt iiff uunniitt iissnnoott lleevveell..

• Use spreader bars to avoid unit damage.

• Spreader bar must be a minimum of 11 feet for 20-85 ton units and 12 feet for 90-110 tons. Chainsmust not bear on top of unit.

• Do not use hooks to lift unit. Do not hook into openchannels to lift unit. Loop chain through lifting lug.See detail in Figure 15, p. 34 and Figure 17, p. 35.

• Lift using overhead crane only. Adjust rigging forunit center of gravity.

• Unit center of gravity will fall within center ofgravity block at various locations depending on unitoptions.

• See unit nameplate for unit weights.

• Do not stack units.

Figure 15. Detail of how to loop chain through liftinglug on self-contained

Table 22. Gravity Block Dimensions 20 to 80 tons, in.

Unit Size A B C

20-35 25 32 38

42-80 33 34 50

Figure 16. Gravity Block Dimensions 20 to 80 tons, in.

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 35

Figure 17. Gravity block location and dimensions for 90 to 110 ton units

Installation PreparationBefore installing the unit, perform the followingprocedures to ensure proper unit operation.

1. Position the unit and skid assembly in its finallocation.

2. Test lift the unit to determine exact unit balance andstability before hoisting it to the installationlocation. See “Unit Handling,” p. 34 for properrigging procedures and cautions.

3. Remove the skids from under the unit. See Figure3, p. 22. Refer to the “Skid Removal” section. If youfind internal damage, file a claim immediately tothe delivering carrier.

4. Remove the protective shipping covers from theunit.

5. Verify isolators are properly tightened foroperation. See “Unit Vibration Isolator Option,” p.35.

6. Tighten compressor isolator mounting bolts.Torque to 18 ft/lbs. (plus/minus 2 ft/Lbs.)

Unit Vibration Isolator OptionIImmppoorrttaanntt:: Vibration isolation is not necessary for the

unit since the factory internally isolates thefan and compressors, thus creating doubleisolation. Trane strongly recommends thatyou consult a vibration specialist whenconsidering double isolation. In general,Trane does not recommend double-isolation.

If job requirements dictate unit isolators, use a housed-spring isolator with a locating pin. Factory-providedunit isolators are type CP and indicate the springnumber on the outer housing. See . Set the spring-typevibration isolators in position before completingelectrical, piping, or duct connections. The 20-38 tonunits require four isolators per unit, and the 40-80 tonunits require six isolators per unit. Reference theisolator placement sheet that ships with the isolators toindicate proper placement.

Unit Isolator Installation ProcedureUse the following procedure to install isolators:

1. Position the isolators under the unit base referringto the isolator placement sheet that ships with theunit isolators. Lift one end of the unit at a time toposition the isolators. Fasten the isolators to thefloor using anchor bolts.

2. Level the unit by adjusting the isolator heights. Unitweight may cause the upper housing of the springisolators to rest on the lower housing. Maintainclearances between 1/4 and 1/2". To increase theclearance, lift the unit off the isolator and turn theleveling bolt counterclockwise. Verify that the unitis level and the housing clearances are correct. Themaximum allowable difference between isolatorheights is 1/4". Shim as required under theisolators.

NNoottee:: The unit is equipped with a positively slopeddrain pan to help indoor air quality (IAQ) anddoes not require one corner of the unit to bepitched.

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- MMeecchhaanniiccaall

36 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Figure 18. Optional spring isolator dimensional data

Duct ConnectionsReturn air enters the rear of the unit and conditionedsupply air discharges through the top. Attach supply airductwork directly to the unit’s top panel, around the fandischarge opening. A duct collar is not provided.

NNoottee:: Units equipped with flexible horizontal dischargeplenum option may include a duct collar whenholes are factory cut. If discharge openings arefield-cut, refer to the following “Installation —Plenum” section.

Install all air ducts according to the National FireProtection Association standards for the “Installation ofAir Conditioning and Ventilation Systems other thanResidence Type (NFPA 90A) and Residence Type WarmAir Heating and Air Conditioning Systems (NFPA 90B).

Make duct connections to the unit with a flexiblematerial such as heavy canvas. If a fire hazard exists,Trane recommends using Flexweave 1000, type FW30or equivalent canvas. Use three inches for return ductand three inches for discharge duct. Keep materialloose to absorb fan vibration.

• If using return ductwork to the unit, secure it withthree inches of flexible duct connector.

• Extend discharge duct upward without change insize or direction for at least three fan diameters.

• Use 3" flexible duct connection on dischargeductwork.

NNoottee:: Compressors and fan assembly are internallyisolated. External isolation devices (springmounting isolators) are at discretion of avibration specialist consulted by building orHVAC system designer.

Run the ductwork straight from the opening for aminimum of three fan diameters. See Figure 19, p. 36.Extend remaining ductwork as far as possible withoutchanging size or direction. Do not make abrupt turns or

transitions near the unit due to increased noise andexcessive static losses. Use elbows with splitters orturning vanes to minimize static losses.

Poorly constructed turning vanes may cause airflowgenerated noise. Align the fan outlet properly with theductwork to decrease noise levels in the duct and toincrease fan performance. To complete trunk ductworkto the VAV terminal units, refer to the VAV boxmanuals for specific requirements. Check total externalstatic pressures against fan characteristics to be surethe required airflow is available throughout theductwork.

To achieve maximum acoustical performance,minimize the duct static pressure setpoint.

Figure 19. Duct connection recommendations

3 Fan Diameters

DuctDischarge

3-inch

DuctFlexible

AirReturn

Installing the PlenumBefore installing plenum, attach insulation strip thatships with plenum. See Figure 20, p. 37 for proper


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 37

insulation location. Align plenum front with controlpanel side of unit. Using strips and screws provided,secure plenum to unit. Treat field-cut holes to preventfiberglass from entering the air stream.

NNoottee:: Plenum insulation must be applied properly toprevent air bypass around the plenum. SeeFigure 20, p. 37.

Figure 20. Correct plenum insulation placement

Plenum Bottom View

Dashed line indicates correct insulation placement.

Installing the Airside EconomizerNNoottee:: Airside economizer option available on 20 to 80

tons only.

UUnniitt HHaannddlliinngg

1. Hoist the damper cabinet to the installation locationwith straps positioned under the skid as shown inFigure 21, p. 38. Use spreader bars to prevent unitdamage during lifting.

2. With the damper cabinet at its final location (nearthe unit), remove the screws securing it to the skidfrom the side flanges. Retain these screws for lateruse.

UUnniitt PPrreeppaarraattiioonn

3. Open the access door and remove the dampercabinet’s support legs and its hanging bracket. Thesupport legs are secured to the skid, and thehanging bracket is secured with wire ties to aninside flange near the cabinet’s base. Remove theC-channel collar and install it on the unit, if notalready installed.

4. Remove the roll of 1/8" thick gasket from thedamper cabinet’s W-supports, and apply it to the C-channel collar mounted on the rear of the unit. Thisgasket will provide a seal between the dampercabinet and the unit.

5. Attach the legs (with screws provided) to the legbrackets located on the damper’s base.

6. Attach a field-provided clevis of suitable strength ( >1/2"), to each of the corner lifting brackets throughthe 7/8" diameter holes.

7. Attach to the clevises a means of lifting the dampercabinet from its skid.

UUnniitt IInnssttaallllaattiioonn

8. Slowly raise the damper cabinet from its skid.

9. Attach the hanging bracket across the front of thedamper cabinet. Position it with its short flangepointing to four o’clock, and secure it with screwsprovided. See Figure 21, p. 38.

10. Lift the damper cabinet and position it such that thehanging bracket is positioned over the unit’s C-channel collar.

11. Lower the damper cabinet until the holes in its sideflanges are aligned with the holes in the C-channelcollar. Install screws removed in step 3 through thedamper cabinet’s side flanges and into the C-channel’s corresponding holes.

12. Attach ductwork to the top and back dampersaccording to local codes.

FFiieelldd WWiirriinngg CCoonnnneeccttiioonnss


13. Open the damper cabinet’s door and connect theffaaccttoorryy--pprroovviiddeedd pplluugg from the actuator to theffaaccttoorryy--pprroovviiddeedd pplluugg in the unit’s filter section.

14. CCaabbiinneettss wwiitthh TTRRAAQQ ddaammppeerrss oonnllyy:: Unroll tworolls of pneumatic tubing located inside dampercabinet. Route tubes through cabinet’s front upperpanel (0.25 dia. holes provided). Connect to twopneumatic tubes protruding from customerelectrical connection panel on unit. Be sure toconnect black to black, white stripe to white stripe).

15. CCaabbiinneettss wwiitthh TTRRAAQQ ddaammppeerrss oonnllyy:: Locate the“bullet” sensor and rolled up wiring in the unit’sfilter section. Route it into the damper cabinet andinsert the sensor into the sensor mounting clipattached to underside of one of the Traq dampers.


38 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Figure 21. Proper lifting of the airside economizer(top) and airside economizer option (bottom)

SpreaderBar

StrapLifting Cable with

spreader bar

C-Channel

Hanging Bracket

Water PipingCondenser Connections

WWAARRNNIINNGGHHiigghh PPrreessssuurree WWaatteerr!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy,, aanndd eeqquuiippmmeenntt ddaammaaggee..PPrroovviiddee rreelliieeff vvaallvvee oonn ssyysstteemm wwaatteerr ppiippiinngg ttoopprreevveenntt iinnssttaannttaanneeoouuss rreelleeaassee ooff hhiigghh pprreessssuurreewwaatteerr..

NNOOTTIICCEEPPrrooppeerr WWaatteerr TTrreeaattmmeenntt RReeqquuiirreedd!!TThhee uussee ooff uunnttrreeaatteedd oorr iimmpprrooppeerrllyy ttrreeaatteedd wwaatteerrccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ssccaalliinngg,, eerroossiioonn,, ccoorrrroossiioonn,, aallggaaee oorrsslliimmee..UUssee tthhee sseerrvviicceess ooff aa qquuaalliiffiieedd wwaatteerr ttrreeaattmmeennttssppeecciiaalliisstt ttoo ddeetteerrmmiinnee wwhhaatt wwaatteerr ttrreeaattmmeenntt,, iiffaannyy,, iiss rreeqquuiirreedd.. TTrraannee aassssuummeess nnoo rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyyffoorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt ffaaiilluurreess wwhhiicchh rreessuulltt ffrroomm uunnttrreeaatteeddoorr iimmpprrooppeerrllyy ttrreeaatteedd wwaatteerr,, oorr ssaalliinnee oorr bbrraacckkiisshhwwaatteerr..

Condenser water piping knockouts are in the lower leftend panel. If necessary, remove insulation to gainaccess. All field-installed piping must conform toapplicable local, state, and federal codes. To completecondenser water connections follow the procedurebelow.

NNoottee:: Four (4) condenser waterline drain plugs ship ina bag in the left end of the unit. The installermust field install these four plugs using pipethread sealer. An additional plug is provided forunits with a waterside economizer.

1. Install the vent plugs in the economizer coil headersand condenser manifolds. See These plugs ship in abag with the condenser drain plugs.

2. Attach the water supply line to the inlet connection,and the return line to the outlet connection.Entering and leaving water connections for allcondensers are factory manifolded and require onlysingle connections for entering and leaving water. Ifthe unit has a waterside economizer and/or controlvalves, the factory pipes between thesecomponents.

3. If using a cooling tower, refer to for a typical pipingcircuit from the unit.

4. Ensure the water pressure to the unit does notexceed 400 psig.

NNoottee:: To prevent water pump damage, design systempiping to provide relief when using energysaving waterside economizer valves.

Figure 22. Economizer coil vent and condensercleanout/drain plugs.

Condensate Drain ConnectionsThe condensate drain is internally trapped. Condensatedrain connections are on the right side of the unit.Connect condensate drain piping to the 1-1/4” NPTfemale fitting, using at least 7/8" OD copper or 3/4" ODiron pipe. Pitch the condensate line downward a


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 39

minimum of 1/2" for each 10' of horizontal run, awayfrom the unit. Be sure to install the condensate drain“P” trap drain plug. Before starting the unit, fill the trapwith water to prevent negative pressure in the fansection from impeding condensate flow.To facilitatedrain pipe cleaning, install plugged tees in place of 90°elbows.

General Waterside Recommendationsfor Cooling TowersCooling tower control affects the unit cycle rates.Condenser water temperature swings from 10-15°Fmay cause excessive compressor, water valve, and unitcycling. Be sure to set the tower controls to minimizecompressor/unit cycling.

Waterside Piping ArrangementsInstall a condenser water pump between the coolingtower (either open or closed) and the self-containedunit. Lay out the remainder of the system condenserpiping in reverse returns. This helps balance thesystem by equalizing the length of supply and returnpipes. Multi-story buildings may use a direct returnsystem with balancing valves at each floor.

Install the supply riser and its return in close proximity.Furnish both with permanent thermometers to checkthe waterside balance during startup and routinemaintenance checks.

Also, include strainers at each pump inlet and unit.Install drain valves at the riser’s base to allow drainagepoints for system flushing during startup and routinemaintenance. For condenser draining and headerremoval, include a shutoff/balancing valve on theentering and leaving waterside pipes, drain tees, andunions of each unit.

NNoottee:: Unit does not have floor drains.

Figure 23. Condenser water piping components forcooling tower system

Water Temperature RequirementsDo not allow the entering water temperature to gobelow 54°F (12.2°C) on units with constant water flow

(basic piping).This will cause the compressors to shutdown and the mechanical cooling function will lockout.However, the economizer (if enabled) will continue tofunction. The compressors will reset when the enteringwater temperature reaches 58°F (15°C).

Units with variable water flow (intermediate piping)have a modulating condensing pressure control valvethat allows compressor operation down to enteringwater temperatures of 35°F (2°C).

For more information on constant and variable waterflow, see the Sequence of Operation section of thismanual.

NNoottee:: Units with a waterside economizer can be setfrom the human interface panel for variable orconstant water flow.

Water Piping Verification• Make return and supply water connections to the

unit and/or waterside economizer piping packagewith recommended valves and piping components.

• Install unions to allow waterside maintenance.

• Install cooling tower and standby pumps.

• Treat water to prevent algae, slime, and corrosion.

• Prevent refrigerant piping from rubbing againstother objects.

Installating the Hydronic CoilSteam and Hot Water Coil

WWAARRNNIINNGGUUnniitt SSttrruuccttuurraall IInntteeggrriittyy!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..UUnniitt ppaanneellss pprroovviiddee ssttrruuccttuurraall iinntteeggrriittyy.. DDoo nnoottrreemmoovvee mmoorree tthhaann ttwwoo nnoonn--aaddjjaacceenntt ppaanneellss aatt oonneettiimmee aass tthhiiss ccoouulldd ccaauussee tthhee pplleennuumm ffrraammee ttooccoollllaappssee..

NNoottee:: Hydronic coil options are available only on 20-80ton units and can be field or factory mounted.

1. Position the coil box behind the unit with open sidefacing the unit inlet.

2. An envelope containing the gasket and mountingscrews to attach the coil to the unit ships in thebottom of the unit. Install the pressure sensitivegasket to the unit side of the vertical flange on thecoil box in two places.

3. Before attaching the coil box, connect the coil ductstatic pressure tube. This must be done before thecoil box is bolted to the unit. If the unit connectiondoes not have a static pressure tube, then noconnection is required.

4. Apply edge protector to the flange on unit. Removeknockout on the unit filter cover and install the


40 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

bushing in the plastic bag. Run the wires throughthe bushing and connect wires to the unit.

5. After connecting wires and the static pressure tube,raise the coil box up against the unit and install themounting screws. Recommended lifting points areat each end of the coil box.

6. Avoid routing wires over devices and sharp edges.Use wire ties about every 12 inches to secure wiresto other wire harnesses.

7. Move the entering air temperature sensor upstreamof the coil to ensure proper operation.

Refrigerant SystemTrane Water Cooled Commercial Self-Contained unitsship factory charged with R-410A refrigerant.

Trane Air Cooled Commercial Self-Contained andCondenser units ship with a dry nitrogen holdingcharge.

Before installing refrigerant piping, verify holdingcharge is present. Momentarily depress the CSCsuction or discharge line (and condenser liquid line)access port valves.

If charge is present, continue with piping installation.

If no nitrogen escapes the access valve, leak test theunit refrigerant system to determine the leak source,and repair. See Maintenance section, “Refrigerant LeakTest Procedure,” p. 92. After finding leak, remove testpressure and repair leak using proper brazingprocedures. See Maintenance section, “BrazingProcedures,” p. 93. Retest unit(s) to ensure all leaks arerepaired. Continue with piping installation.

Interconnecting PipingRefrigerant piping must be properly sized and applied.These two factors have a significant effect on bothsystem performance and reliability.

Using , select proper liquid and discharge line size. Unitconnection sizes are also shown. Installinterconnecting piping using proper installation andbrazing procedures.

Work on only one circuit at a time to minimize systemexposure to potentially harmful moisture in the air.

Before installing piping verify compressor oil levels arenear top of sight glass or above.

NNoottee:: CSC units (and replacement compressors) shipfully charged with POE oil from the factory.Scroll compressors use POE oil (OIL00079, quartcontainer or OIL00080, gallon container), DONOT substitute.

Capped discharge and liquid line connections arelocated near bottom, left side of the indoor unit. CCRC/CIRC connections are located in the unit front, at top.

Remove caps with a tube cutter to minimize risk ofgetting chips inside piping.

NNoottee:: When facing the control panel side of the unit.Circuit #2 is always on the left and Circuit #1 isalways on the right.

Cleanliness is extremely important during systeminstallation to minimize residual contaminants, such asoxidization and scale.

Attach vacuum pump and begin evacuation as soon aspiping installation is complete. This starts systemdehydration and helps prevent POE compressor oilcontamination. This will also indicate large leaks ifvacuum does not hold (below 400 microns and hold for2 hours). Complete LeakTest and Evacuation (forprocedures, see “Refrigerant Leak Test Procedure,” p.92 and “System Evacuation Procedures,” p. 93 inMaintenance section) before starting “PreliminaryRefrigerant Charging,” p. 41.

NNootteess::

• Installation of a field supplied discharge lineaccess port near indoor units with optionaldischarge line ball valve will make high sidepressure measurements easier during leaktest.

• UseType “L” refrigerant grade coppertubing only.

NNOOTTIICCEECCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!PPOOEE ooiill iiss hhyyggrroossccooppiicc –– iitt aabbssoorrbbss wwaatteerr ddiirreeccttllyyffrroomm tthhee aaiirr.. TThhiiss wwaatteerr iiss nneeaarrllyy iimmppoossssiibbllee ttoorreemmoovvee ffrroomm tthhee ccoommpprreessssoorr ooiill aanndd ccaann rreessuulltt iinnccoommpprreessssoorr ffaaiilluurreess..TToo pprreevveenntt PPOOEE ooiill ffrroomm aabbssoorrbbiinngg wwaatteerr,, tthheessyysstteemm sshhoouulldd nnoott rreemmaaiinn ooppeenn ffoorr lloonnggeerr tthhaannnneecceessssaarryy.. WWhheenn ooppeenn,, ddrryy nniittrrooggeenn sshhoouulldd fflloowwtthhrroouugghh tthhee ppiippiinngg.. OOnnllyy nneeww ooiill ccoonnttaaiinneerrss sshhoouullddbbee uusseedd ffoorr sseerrvviiccee aanndd mmaaiinntteennaannccee.. AAllwwaayyss uusseetthhee ssmmaalllleesstt ccoonnttaaiinneerr ssiizzee rreeqquuiirreedd ffoorr tthhee jjoobbrreeqquuiirreemmeennttss.. AAllwwaayyss lleeaavvee tthhee ooiill ccoonnttaaiinneerrttiigghhttllyy sseeaalleedd uunnttiill ttiimmee ooff uussee.. DDoo nnoott rreeuussee ooiilltthhaatt hhaass bbeeeenn ooppeenneedd..


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 41

Table 23. Refrigerant piping sizes

Air Cooled Signature Connection Size (in)

Circuit 1 Circuit 2

SXRF Size Liquid Discharge Liquid Discharge

25, 29 5/8 7/8 5/8 7/8

30, 35, 40, 50 7/8 1 3/8 5/8 7/8

60 7/8 1 3/8 5/8 7/8

Remote Condenser Connection Size (in)

Circuit 1 Circuit 2

CXRC Size Liquid Discharge Liquid Discharge

20, 29 5/8 7/8 5/8 7/8

35, 40, 50 7/8 1 3/8 5/8 7/8

60 7/8 1 3/8 5/8 7/8

Interconnecting Tube Size (in)

Circuit 1 Circuit 2

SXRF/CXRC Size Liquid Discharge Liquid Discharge

25/29 5/8 1 1/8 5/8 7/8

29/29 5/8 1 1/8 5/8 7/8

30/35 7/8 1 1/8 5/8 7/8

35/35 7/8 1 1/8 5/8 7/8

40/40 7/8 1 3/8(a) 5/8 7/8

50/50 7/8 1 3/8 5/8 1 1/8

60/60 7/8 1 3/8 7/8 1 3/8

(a) Use 1 1/8" for vertical risers.

Preliminary Refrigerant Charging

WWAARRNNIINNGGCCoonnffiinneedd SSppaaccee HHaazzaarrddss!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..DDoo nnoott wwoorrkk iinn ccoonnffiinneedd ssppaacceess wwhheerree rreeffrriiggeerraannttoorr ootthheerr hhaazzaarrddoouuss,, ttooxxiicc oorr ffllaammmmaabbllee ggaass mmaayy bbeelleeaakkiinngg.. RReeffrriiggeerraanntt oorr ootthheerr ggaasseess ccoouulldd ddiissppllaacceeaavvaaiillaabbllee ooxxyyggeenn ttoo bbrreeaatthhee,, ccaauussiinngg ppoossssiibblleeaasspphhyyxxiiaattiioonn oorr ootthheerr sseerriioouuss hheeaalltthh rriisskkss.. SSoommeeggaasseess mmaayy bbee ffllaammmmaabbllee aanndd oorr eexxpplloossiivvee.. IIff aa lleeaakkiinn ssuucchh ssppaacceess iiss ddeetteecctteedd,, eevvaaccuuaattee tthhee aarreeaaiimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy aanndd ccoonnttaacctt tthhee pprrooppeerr rreessccuuee oorrrreessppoonnssee aauutthhoorriittyy..

WWAARRNNIINNGGEExxpplloossiioonn HHaazzaarrdd!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo pprrooppeerrllyy rreegguullaattee pprreessssuurree ccoouulldd rreessuullttiinn aa vviioolleenntt eexxpplloossiioonn,, wwhhiicchh ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh,,sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy,, oorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt oorr pprrooppeerrttyy--oonnllyy--ddaammaaggee..WWhheenn uussiinngg ddrryy nniittrrooggeenn ccyylliinnddeerrss ffoorrpprreessssuurriizziinngg uunniittss ffoorr lleeaakk tteessttiinngg,, aallwwaayyss pprroovviiddeeaa pprreessssuurree rreegguullaattoorr oonn tthhee ccyylliinnddeerr ttoo pprreevveenntteexxcceessssiivveellyy hhiigghh uunniitt pprreessssuurreess.. NNeevveerr pprreessssuurriizzeeuunniitt aabboovvee tthhee mmaaxxiimmuumm rreeccoommmmeennddeedd uunniitt tteessttpprreessssuurree aass ssppeecciiffiieedd iinn aapppplliiccaabbllee uunniitt lliitteerraattuurree..


42 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

WWAARRNNIINNGGHHaazzaarrddoouuss PPrreessssuurreess!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnaa vviioolleenntt eexxpplloossiioonn,, wwhhiicchh ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorrsseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..IIff aa hheeaatt ssoouurrccee iiss rreeqquuiirreedd ttoo rraaiissee tthhee ttaannkkpprreessssuurree dduurriinngg rreemmoovvaall ooff rreeffrriiggeerraanntt ffrroommccyylliinnddeerrss,, uussee oonnllyy wwaarrmm wwaatteerr oorr hheeaatt bbllaannkkeettss ttoorraaiissee tthhee ttaannkk tteemmppeerraattuurree.. DDoo nnoott eexxcceeeedd aatteemmppeerraattuurree ooff 115500°°FF.. DDoo nnoott uunnddeerr aannyycciirrccuummssttaanncceess aappppllyy ddiirreecctt ffllaammee ttoo aannyy ppoorrttiioonn oofftthhee ccyylliinnddeerr..

CCAAUUTTIIOONNRReeffrriiggeerraanntt aatt FFrreeeezziinngg TTeemmppeerraattuurree!!DDiirreecctt ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh lliiqquuiidd rreeffrriiggeerraanntt ccoouulldd rreessuullttiinn mmiinnoorr oorr mmooddeerraattee iinnjjuurryy..AAvvooiidd ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh sskkiinn.. IIff wwoorrkkiinngg wwiitthh rreeffrriiggeerraannttiiss nneecceessssaarryy,, yyoouu MMUUSSTT wweeaarr aallll PPeerrssoonnaallPPrrootteeccttiivvee EEqquuiippmmeenntt ((PPPPEE)) iinncclluuddiinngg eeyyeepprrootteeccttiioonn,, ssaaffeettyy gglloovveess,, lloonngg sslleeeevveess,, aanndd ppaannttss..IInn ccaassee ooff ccoonnttaacctt,, ttrreeaatt tthhee iinnjjuurryy ssiimmiillaarr ttooffrroossttbbiittee.. SSlloowwllyy wwaarrmm tthhee aaffffeecctteedd aarreeaa wwiitthhlluukkeewwaarrmm wwaatteerr aanndd sseeeekk iimmmmeeddiiaattee mmeeddiiccaallaatttteennttiioonn..

NNOOTTIICCEECCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnccoommpprreessssoorr ffaaiilluurree..IIff iitt bbeeccoommeess nneecceessssaarryy ttoo rreemmoovvee oorr rreecchhaarrggee tthheessyysstteemm wwiitthh rreeffrriiggeerraanntt,, iitt iiss iimmppoorrttaanntt tthhaatt tthheeffoolllloowwiinngg aaccttiioonnss aarree ttaakkeenn::•• TToo pprreevveenntt ccrroossss ccoonnttaammiinnaattiioonn ooff rreeffrriiggeerraannttssaanndd ooiillss,, uussee oonnllyy ddeeddiiccaatteedd RR--441100AA sseerrvviicceeeeqquuiippmmeenntt..•• DDiissccoonnnneecctt uunniitt ppoowweerr bbeeffoorree eevvaaccuuaattiioonn aannddddoo nnoott aappppllyy vvoollttaaggee ttoo ccoommpprreessssoorr wwhhiillee uunnddeerrvvaaccuuuumm..•• DDuuee ttoo pprreesseennccee ooff PPOOEE ooiill,, ddoo nnoott lleeaavvee tthheessyysstteemm ooppeenn ffoorr mmoorree tthhaann 11 hhoouurr..•• AAllllooww tthhee ccrraannkkccaassee hheeaatteerr ttoo ooppeerraattee aammiinniimmuumm ooff 2244 hhoouurrss bbeeffoorree ssttaarrttiinnggccoommpprreessssoorrss..•• DDoo nnoott aallllooww lliiqquuiidd rreeffrriiggeerraanntt ttoo eenntteerr tthheessuuccttiioonn lliinnee..•• DDoo nnoott aallllooww eexxcceessssiivvee lliiqquuiidd aaccccuummuullaattiioonn iinntthhee lliiqquuiidd lliinneess..•• DDoo nnoott ooppeerraattee tthhee ccoommpprreessssoorrss wwiitthhoouutt tthheepprrooppeerr lleevveell ooff rreeffrriiggeerraanntt iinn eeaacchh cciirrccuuiitt..

To charge the system:

1. Verify system leak check (including interconnectingpiping for air cooled systems) and evacuation arecomplete before adding refrigerant.

See “Refrigerant Leak Test Procedure,” p. 92 and“System Evacuation Procedures,” p. 93

2. Ensure field-supplied unit disconnect is OFF. Verifythat the unit 115 volt control circuit switch is OFFand reset relays have been unplugged, to preventinadvertent compressor starts.

3. Turn field-supplied unit disconnect ON to energizecrankcase heaters. Verify crankcase heaters areoperating.

4. Verify all service valves are open.

5. See CSC General Data for unit refrigerant charge.

6. See for additional charge required based on fieldpiping size and length. Add this to the chargeamount from Step 5 for the total charge.

NNoottee:: Step 6 not required for field piping under 25feet, or for water cooled system.

7. At the liquid line angle valve add as much R-410ALIQUID as possible up to, but not exceeding, totalcharge amount. Depending on conditions, it maynot be possible to add more than 60% of the totalcharge. This will be adequate for compressorstartup. More charge will be added aftercompressors are started. Use an accurate scale tomeasure and record preliminary amount ofrefrigerant added to each circuit.

NNoottee:: AAiirr CCoooolleedd OOnnllyy:: Add charge at thecondenser access valve or field supplieddischarge line access valve. If angle valve isused for charging, liquid line solenoid valveshould be open.

8. DO NOT add refrigerant in the suction line duringpreliminary charging to minimize refrigerant insystem low side prior to compressor start.

9. Record charge amount added.

10. If total charge is not reached see Final RefrigerantCharge in Startup.

11. Verify wiring has been returned to original.

NNoottee:: AAiirr CCoooolleedd OOnnllyy:: Verify liquid line solenoidvalve has been returned to original.

Table 24. Charge add —lbs per 10 ft of line

Piping Size (in) Liquid Line (lbs)Discharge Line

(lbs)

5/8 1.07 -

7/8 2.23 0.31

1 1/8 - 0.53

1 3/8 - 0.80

Note: Amounts listed are for 10 ft of pipe above 25'. Actualrequirements will be in direct proportion to the actual lengthof piping.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 43

Installation - ElectricalUnit Wiring DiagramsSpecific unit wiring diagrams are provided on theinside of the control panel door. Use these diagramsfor connections or trouble analysis.

Supply Power WiringIt is the responsibility of the installer to provide powersupply wiring to the unit terminal block or the non-fused disconnect switch option. Wiring should conformto NEC and all applicable code requirements.

Bring supply wiring through the knockout in the lowerleft side of the unit control panel. Connect the threephase wires to the power terminal block or the non-fused disconnect switch in the control box terminals.Refer to specific wiring diagrams and fuse informationin the control panel.

WWAARRNNIINNGGHHaazzaarrddoouuss SSeerrvviiccee PPrroocceedduurreess!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww aallll pprreeccaauuttiioonnss iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaall aannddoonn tthhee ttaaggss,, ssttiicckkeerrss,, aanndd llaabbeellss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..TTeecchhnniicciiaannss,, iinn oorrddeerr ttoo pprrootteecctt tthheemmsseellvveess ffrroommppootteennttiiaall eelleeccttrriiccaall,, mmeecchhaanniiccaall,, aanndd cchheemmiiccaallhhaazzaarrddss,, MMUUSSTT ffoollllooww pprreeccaauuttiioonnss iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaallaanndd oonn tthhee ttaaggss,, ssttiicckkeerrss,, aanndd llaabbeellss,, aass wweellll aass tthheeffoolllloowwiinngg iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss:: UUnnlleessss ssppeecciiffiieedd ootthheerrwwiissee,,ddiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriiccaall ppoowweerr iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmootteeddiissccoonnnneecctt aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinnggddeevviicceess ssuucchh aass ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg..FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttooeennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaann nnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyyeenneerrggiizzeedd.. WWhheenn nneecceessssaarryy ttoo wwoorrkk wwiitthh lliivveeeelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss,, hhaavvee aa qquuaalliiffiieedd lliicceennsseeddeelleeccttrriicciiaann oorr ootthheerr iinnddiivviidduuaall wwhhoo hhaass bbeeeennttrraaiinneedd iinn hhaannddlliinngg lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttssppeerrffoorrmm tthheessee ttaasskkss..

NNOOTTIICCEEUUssee CCooppppeerr CCoonndduuccttoorrss OOnnllyy!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo uussee ccooppppeerr ccoonndduuccttoorrss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinneeqquuiippmmeenntt ddaammaaggee aass tthhee eeqquuiippmmeenntt wwaass nnoottddeessiiggnneedd oorr qquuaalliiffiieedd ttoo aacccceepptt ootthheerr ttyyppeess ooffccoonndduuccttoorrss..

NNOOTTIICCEEMMoottoorr DDaammaaggee!!CCoorrrreecctt pphhaassee sseeqquueennccee iiss ccrriittiiccaall.. IIff pphhaasseesseeqquueennccee ooff tthhee iinnccoommiinngg lliinnee vvoollttaaggee iiss nnoottccoorrrreecctt,, iitt ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn mmoottoorr ddaammaaggee..

Voltage RangeVoltages must be within ±10% the nameplate voltage.Ensure the unit voltage is balanced by measuring at thecompressor terminals. Voltage imbalance on threephase systems can cause motor overheating andpremature failure. Maximum allowable imbalance is2.0%.

Voltage ImbalanceRead the voltage at the compressor terminals todetermine if it is balanced. Voltage imbalance on threephase systems can cause motor overheating andpremature failure. The maximum allowable imbalanceis 2.0%. Voltage imbalance is defined as 100 times thesum of the deviation of the three voltages from theaverage (without regard to sign) divided by the averagevoltage. For example, if the three measured voltagesare 221, 230, and 227, the average voltage would be:

(221 + 230 + 227) / 3 = 226 volts

The percentage of voltage imbalance is then:100 * (226 — 221) / 226 = 2.2%

Phase MonitorUnit is equipped with phase monitor in control box.The phase monitor will protect against phase loss,imbalance and reversal of line voltage. If a fault occurs,the red LED will energize. While the fault condition ispresent, the phase monitor interrupts the 115V controlcircuit. If no faults are observed, a green LED will beenergized.

Control Power

NNOOTTIICCEECCoommppoonneenntt DDaammaaggee!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinniimmmmeeddiiaattee oorr pprreemmaattuurree ccoommppoonneenntt ffaaiilluurreess..UUnniitt ttrraannssffoorrmmeerrss aarree ssiizzeedd ttoo pprroovviiddee ppoowweerr ttootthhee uunniitt oonnllyy.. DDoo nnoott uussee tthheessee ttrraannssffoorrmmeerrss ttoossuuppppllyy ppoowweerr ttoo ffiieelldd eeqquuiippmmeenntt..

In this example, 2.2% imbalance is not acceptable.Whenever a voltage imbalance of more than 2.0%exists, check the voltage at the unit disconnect switch.If the imbalance at the unit disconnect switch does notexceed 2.0%, faulty unit wiring is causing theimbalance. Conduct a thorough inspection of the unitelectrical wiring connections to locate the fault, andmake any repairs necessary.

Access the connection terminal block through thecontrol panel on the upper left side of the unit. Allwiring should conform to NEC and applicable localcode requirements.

Be sure all wiring connections are secure. Referencethe unit specific diagrams inside the control panel.

44 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

NNoottee:: Unit transformers IT1, IT3, IT4 and IT5 are sizedto provide power to the unit only.

Selection ProceduresRLA = rated load ampsCompressor LRA = locked rotor ampsFan motor LRA = locked rotor amps, N.E.C. Table 430 -150FLA = full load amps, N.E.C. Table 430 - 150

Voltage utilization range is ±10%

Determination of minimum circuit ampacity (MCA).

MCA = 1.25 x largest motor amps/VFD amps (FLA orRLA) + the sum of the remaining motor amps.

Determination of maximum fuse size (MFS) andmaximum circuit breaker size (MCB):

MFS and MCB = 2.25 x largest motor amps (FLA orRLA) + the sum of the remaining motor amps.

For units with the dual power option, there are twoelectrical circuits that need calculations using theprevious formulas:

• Circuit #1— fans

• Circuit #2— compressors

If the rating value determined does not equal astandard current rating of over current protectivedevice, use the next lower standard rating for themarked maximum rating.

Table 25. Number of compressors per unit

SCRF/SIRF 25 - 29 30 - 35 40 50 60

SCWF/SIWF 29 - 32 35 - 38 42 - 46 52 - 58 65 - 72 80 90 100 110

10 HP 1 3 2 - 1 - - 2 -

15 HP 1 - 1 3 3 4 5 4 6

Table 26. Compressor Electrical Data

SCWF/SIWF SCRF/SIRF

200V 460V 575V 200V 460V 575V

HP RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA HP RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA

10 41.4 267 18.6 142 15.8 103 10 41.4 267 18.6 142 15.8 103

15 56.9 351 25.5 197 23.1 146 15 56.9 351 25.5 197 23.1 146

Table 27. Fan motor electrical data

HP TYPE

200V 460V 575V

FLA LRA FLA LRA FLA LRA

5OPD 15.3 109.0 6.6 48.0 5.2 40.0

TEFC 15.2 128.8 6.7 56.0 5.3 44.8

7.5OPD 23.3 199.0 9.7 84.8 7.8 61.4

TEFC 22.1 164.0 9.6 70.9 7.7 56.9

10OPD 29.5 260.0 12.6 118.0 10.1 72.3

TEFC 29.5 216.0 12.8 103.0 10.3 83.9

15OPD 43.4 271.0 18.9 118.0 15.1 95.9

TEFC 42.5 288.0 18.5 125.0 15.0 102.0

20OPD 57.0 350.0 24.5 156.0 19.6 126.0

TEFC 55.5 402.0 24.2 175.0 19.4 140.0

25OPD 70.0 432.0 30.5 190.0 24.5 155.0

TEFC 71.0 523.0 30.5 188.0 24.5 140.0

30OPD 82.2 514.0 36.6 252.0 29.0 200.0

TEFC 81.0 560.0 38.0 274.0 29.2 177.0

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 45

Table 27. Fan motor electrical data (continued)

HP TYPE

200V 460V 575V

FLA LRA FLA LRA FLA LRA

40OPD 109.0 615.0 49.0 330.0 40.0 270.0

TEFC 111.0 758.0 47.4 320.0 38.0 280.0

50ODP N/A N/A 59.0 378.0 47.0 305.0

TEFC N/A N/A 59.0 455.0 47.2 380.0

60 ODP N/A N/A 71.0 464.0 N/A N/A

Table 28. VFD electrical data

VFD L.I.C.

HP

Without Bypass With Bypass

200V 460V 575V 200V 460V 575V

7.5 23.8 10.6 8.8 32.2 10.6 8.8

10 32.2 14 11.1 48.3 14 16.6

15 48.3 21 16.6 61.9 21 16.6

20 61.9 27.6 21.4 78.2 27.6 21.4

25 78.2 34 26.3 92 34 26.3

30 92 41 31.2 117 41 31.2

40 117 53 39.9 139.2 53 39.9

50 NA 64 50.6 n/a 64 50.6

60 NA 77 NA n/a 77 n/a

Note: Values are at the maximum VFD input rating and not thereduced motor values. L.I.C. = Line Input Current.

Table 29. Single stage electric heat electrical data

SXWFSize

SXRFSize Heat Kw

200VAmps

460VAmps

20 - 18 50 21.7

22 - 18 50 21.7

25 20 18 50 21.7

29 25 23 63.8 27.7

32 29 23 63.8 27.7

35 30 27 75 32.5

38 35 27 75 32.5

42 - 31.5 87.4 37.9

46 40 31.5 87.4 37.9

52 - 39 108.3 46.9

58 50 39 108.3 46.9

65 - 48 133.2 57.7

72 - 48 133.2 57.7

Table 29. Single stage electric heat electrical data(continued)

SXWFSize

SXRFSize Heat Kw

200VAmps

460VAmps

80 60 48 133.2 57.7

Note: Electric heat amperage should not be considered whendetermining minimum circuit ampacity. The current of theunit in the heating mode will not exceed the current of theunit in the cooling mode

Table 30. 2 stage electric heat electrical data

Unit SizeSCWF Heat kW

200VAmps

460VAmps

575VAmps

90 76 N/A 95.39 N/A

100 76 N/A 95.39 N/A

110 76 N/A 95.39 N/A

Static Pressure TransducerInstallation (VAV units only)Supply air static pressure controls the inverter option.A static pressure head assembly ships separate incontrol panel for field installation in the supply air ductwork. Installer is responsible for providing pneumatictubing.

Transducer LocationPlace head assembly in an area of ductwork that willprovide an average and evenly distributed airflowpattern. Use the following guidelines to determine anappropriate installation location.

1. Locate static head assembly approximately 2/3 to 3/4 the way down longest duct run, in an areaapproximately 10 duct diameters downstream and2 duct diameters upstream of major interferences,turns, or changes in duct diameter.

2. When installing pneumatic tubing between headassembly and transducer in control panel, do notexceed 250ft for 1/4” OD tubing or 500ft for 3/8” ODtubing.


46 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Installing the TransducerUse the following procedure to properly install thestatic pressure transducer:

1. Mount pressure sensing head assembly in ductwith sensing tip is in middle of the duct so that itwill provide a proper pressure measurement. SeeFigure 24, p. 46.

2. Connect the pneumatic tubing from the sensinghead to the push-on tubing connection in thecontrol panel. Use a plastic static pickup tubing. Donot exceed 250 feet for 1/4” OD tubing or 500 feetfor 3/8” OD tubing.

Transducer inside control panel picks up low side orreference pressure.

NNoottee:: If plastic tubing pulls away from a connection,trim it back before replacing it on the fitting.Stretched tubing may leak and cause faultycontrol.

Figure 24. Static pressure sensor installation

Duct

PressureSensor

Static PressureHead Assembly

Connectorfor 1/4”Tubing

Sheet Metal Screws(provided by installer) NOTE:

Pleace sensor inletperpendicular to airflow.

Zone Sensor Options for ControlUnitsZone sensor options are available and can be orderedwith the unit or after the unit ships. They also can be

ordered through “Unitary Accessories (ACC)”/“UPGRooftop, Packaged Heat Pump, Split SystemAccessories (ACC)”. Contact your local Trane salesoffice. Following is a full description of zone sensorsand their functions. Following is a full description ofzone sensors and their functions. See Table 39, p. 70for the zone sensor temperature vs. resistancecoefficient curve.

Standard with All Units: BAYSENS077

Zone temperature sensor only

This zone sensor module ships with all units, and canbe used with BAYSENS019, BAYSENS020, orBAYSENS021 remote sensors. When this sensor iswired to one of these remote zone sensors, wiring mustbe 18 AWG shielded twisted pair (Belden 8760 orequivalent). Refer to the specific zone sensor for wiringdetails. It provides the following features and systemcontrol functions:

• Remote temperature sensing in the zone

• Morning warm-up sensor

• Zone sensor for ICS™ systems

• Zone temperature averaging

When used as a remote sensor for standard zonesensor, the thermistor sensor must be disabled.

(Possible Schematic Designation(s): 5U23, 5U26, 5U30,and 5RT5.)


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 47

CV Unit Zone Sensor Options

BAYSENS108Dual setpoint, manual/automatic changeover sensor

BAYSENS110Dual setpoint, manual/automatic changeover sensor with systemfunction

BAYSENS108 and BAYSENS110These zone sensor modules are for use with cooling/heating constant volume units. They have four systemswitch settings (heat, cool, auto, and off) and two fansettings (on and auto).The zone sensor provides eithermanual or automatic changeover control with dualsetpoint capability.

BAYSENS108 and BAYSENS110 features and systemcontrol functions include:

• System control switch to select heating mode(HEAT), cooling mode (COOL), automatic selectionof heating or cooling as required (AUTO), or to turnthe system off (OFF).

• Fan control switch to select automatic fan operationwhile actively heating or cooling (AUTO), orcontinuous fan operation (ON).

• Dual temperature setpoint levers for setting desiredtemperature. The blue lever controls cooling, andthe red lever controls heating.

• Thermometer to indicate temperature in the zone.This indicator is factory calibrated.

(Possible Schematic Designation: 5U29)

BAYSENS110 only function status indicator lightsinclude:

• SYSTEM ON glows continuously during normaloperation, or blinks if system is in test mode.

• COOL glows continuously during cooling cycles, orblinks to indicate a cooling system failure.

• HEAT glows continuously during heating cycles, orblinks to indicate a heating system failure.

• SERVICE blinks or glows to indicate a problem.These signals vary depending on the particularequipment being used.


Integrated Comfort SystemsSensors for CV and VAVApplicationsCV and VAV Unit Zone Sensor OptionsThese zone sensor options are for use with cooling/heating Integrated Comfort System (ICS) systems.

BAYSENS074Zone temperature sensor with timed override and localsetpoint adjustment

This electronic analog sensor features single setpointcapability and timed override with overridecancellation. BAYSENS074 features and system controlfunctions include:


• A timed override button to move an ICS or abuilding management system from its“unoccupied” to “occupied” mode

• Thumbwheel for local setpoint adjustment

• A cancel button to cancel the “unoccupiedoverride” command



48 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

BAYSENS073Zone temperature sensor with timed override

This electronic analog sensor features single setpointcapability and timed override with overridecancellation. It is used with a Trane® IntegratedComfort™ system.

BAYSENS073 features and system control functionsinclude:


• A timed override button to move an ICS or abuilding management system from its“unoccupied” to “occupied” mode

• Cancel button to cancel the “unoccupied override”mode


Figure 25. Zone sensor mounting hole locations for:BAYSENS077

RIGHT BACK

1-3/32 [27,43 mm]3/32 [2,00 mm]

1-3/8 [35,00 mm]

19/32 [15,00 mm]

15/64 [6,00 mm]

3-5/32 [80,00 mm]

1-1/32 [26,16 mm]

5/32 [3,81 mm] 4X

Zone Sensor InstallationWWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggeeccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorrsseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmootteeddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunnccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerrlloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerrccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. FFoorr vvaarriiaabblleeffrreeqquueennccyy ddrriivveess oorr ootthheerr eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinnggccoommppoonneennttss pprroovviiddeedd bbyy TTrraannee oorr ootthheerrss,, rreeffeerr ttootthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss lliitteerraattuurree ffoorraalllloowwaabbllee wwaaiittiinngg ppeerriiooddss ffoorr ddiisscchhaarrggee ooffccaappaacciittoorrss.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerrrraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavveeddiisscchhaarrggeedd..FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffeeddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

NNOOTTIICCEEUUssee CCooppppeerr CCoonndduuccttoorrss OOnnllyy!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo uussee ccooppppeerr ccoonndduuccttoorrss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinneeqquuiippmmeenntt ddaammaaggee aass tthhee eeqquuiippmmeenntt wwaass nnoottddeessiiggnneedd oorr qquuaalliiffiieedd ttoo aacccceepptt ootthheerr ttyyppeess ooffccoonndduuccttoorrss..

NNoottee:: For additional information regarding the safedischarge of capacitors, see PROD-SVB06

All sensor options ship in the main control panel andare field installed. Programmable option installationprocedures.

Mounting LocationMount the sensor on the wall in an area with good aircirculation at an average temperature. Avoid mountingspace temperature sensor is areas subject to thefollowing conditions:

• Drafts or “dead” spots behind doors or in corners

• Hot or cold air from ducts

• Radiant heat from the sun or appliances

• Concealed pipes and chimneys

• Unheated or non-cooled surfaces behind thesensor, such as outside walls

• Airflows from adjacent zones or other units

To mount the sensors, remove the dust cover andmount the base on a flat surface or 2" x 4" junction box.Sensors ship with mounting screws.

Mounting the SubbaseRemove the zone sensor cover from subbase, andmount subbase on the wall or on a 2 x 4 junction box.Route wires through the wire access hole in the


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 49

subbase. See Figure 26, p. 49. Seal the hole in the wallbehind the subbase.

NNoottee:: Guidelines for wire sizes and lengths are shownin Table 31, p. 49. The total resistance of theselow voltage wires must not exceed 2.5 ohms perconductor. Any resistance greater than 2.5 ohmsmay cause the control to malfunction due toexcessive voltage drop.

NNoottee:: Do not run low-voltage control wiring in sameconduit with high-voltage power wiring.

Wiring1. Run wires between the unit control panel and the

zone sensor subbase. To determine the number ofwires required, refer to the unit wiring diagrams.

2. Connect the wiring to the appropriate terminals atthe unit control panel and at the zone sensorsubbase. In general, zone sensor connections to theunit use the convention of connecting zone sensorterminals to like numbered unit terminals (1 to 1, 2to 2, etc.).The connection detail is shown on the unitwiring diagrams, which are located in the unitcontrol panel.

3. Replace the zone sensor cover back on the subbaseand snap securely into place.

Standard Remote Sensor (BAYSENS077)When using the remote sensor, BAYSENS077, mount itin the space that is to be controlled. Wire according tothe interconnecting wiring diagrams on the unit.

Table 31. Zone sensor maximum lengths and wiresize

Distance from Unit toController

RecommendedWiringSize

0-150 feet 22 gauge

151-240 feet 20 gauge




Figure 26. Typical zone sensor installation

Junc-

tion

Mounting to Junction Box

Mounting Directly to the Wall

Programmable Zone SensorsBAYSENS119

The BAYSENS119 programmable night set back sensorprovides multi functional flexibility for both ConstantVolume and Variable Air Volume control. Thiselectronic programmable sensor includes auto ormanual cooling and heating changeover with seven-day programming.

Five tactile feel buttons located on the sensor frontpanel provide interface for all programming, includinginitial setup for CV or VAV control. Sensor functionalityincludes up to four daily programmable periods forOccupied/Unoccupied operation, and Override. Thedynamic LCD display indicates status for System On/Off, Heat, Cool, Fan Status, Time of Day, Occupied/Unoccupied mode, Space Temperature, Space orDischarge Air Heating and Cooling Setpoints.Additional features include Service Indication for HeatFailure, Cool Failure, Fan Failure, and Test Mode ifsystem is operating in test mode.

A Check Filter Timer function is included. Filter servicecountdown time can be set in one-day increments.Activation of the Test/Configuration button located onthe bottom of the sensor performs a sensor self-diagnostic routine and indicates hours in service.

When the BAYSENS119 is programmed for ConstantVolume or VAV control, Night Setback is initiated


50 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

through the scheduled Unoccupied time setting. Whenthe sensor switches to Night Setback, the outdoordampers close and heating/cooling functions areenabled/disabled based on set up parameters. Asbuilding load changes, If heating/cooling functions areenabled, the Sensor energizes self-contained unit andevaporator fan operation. The unit will cycle heating/cooling operation throughout the Unoccupied periodas required to maintain Unoccupied space temperaturesetpoints. When the Unoccupied time period hasexpired, all heating/cooling functions return to normaloperation.

When Night Setback options are used with VAVheating/cooling, maintain airflow through the self-contained unit by electronically tying the VAV terminalsto the unoccupied output relay contacts on the self-contained units low voltage terminal board, or by usingchangeover thermostats. Either of these methods willassure adequate airflow through the unit andsatisfactory temperature control of the space.

NNoottee:: Refer to BAS-SVX17*-EN for completeInstallation, Operation, and MaintenanceInstructions.

Time Clock OptionGrasslin Time Clock Option

The time clock option has a programmable timer that isfactory wired to the unoccupied input to provide on/offcontrol. The time clock will not allow the unit to passthrough the night setback/morning warm-up mode,except on units with optional night heat/morningwarm-up, or programmable night setback.

The time clock, a “Digi 20” by Grasslin, is inside thecontrol panel, but accessible with the control paneldoor closed. This same type timer is also used forprogrammable night setback/morning warm up.Programming instructions for the “Digi 20” timer are inthe “Programming” section.

Installing the Time Clock1. Ensure operating temperature is between 4°F and

131°F.

2. Locate the time clock at least 5 feet away from anylarge electrical contact or machinery to avoidpossible electrical interference problems.

3. Provide a separate independent circuit for the timeclock power supply.

4. Since all electronic instruments are sensitive tovoltage spikes, pay close attention to the following:

a. If possible, supply power to the electronic timeclock from a phase different than the onesupplying power to the load.

b. Provide a suitable Varistor or RC network acrossthe INDUCTIVE LOADS supply terminals toreduce voltage spikes.

c. Place a diode across the DC OPERATEDINDUCTOR terminals to eliminate back EMF.

d. HIGHLY INDUCTIVE LOADS, especiallyfluorescent lights, may require a relay in whichcase, then Step a and Step c apply.

The time clock can be surface or flush mounted. Lift offthe front cover and loosen the two screws on oppositecorners. Pull off the base’s plug with a left to rightrolling motion.

Surface Mounting Inside Panel1. Place screws through the base’s preset holes and

screw to back of panel or wall.

2. Wire according to the instructions in the followingsection. Depending upon the specific installation,you may find it more convenient to complete wiringbefore attaching the base.

3. Place the terminal cover over the terminal block byaligning the two screws with the corner holes in thebase.

4. Push the timer firmly onto the plug in the base.

5. Tighten the two screws. A base for DIN railmounting is optional.

Wiring the Time Clock1. Wire 24, 120, or 220 VAC to input terminals. Make

sure to apply correct voltage. Using incorrectvoltage will void the warranty.

2. Connect wire to the screw terminals according tothe unit wiring diagrams. Use 12 to 22 AWG wire.

Remote Human Interface PanelInstallationHuman Interface (HI) PanelThe HI enables the user to communicate necessary unitoperating parameters and receive operating statusinformation from within the occupied space.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 51

The HI displays top level information in the LCDwindow, unless the operator initiates other displays,for the various unit functions. It also displays menureadouts in a clear language 2 line, 40 character format.The 16-key keypad allows the operator to scrollthrough the various menus to set or modify theoperating parameters. See figure below to referencethe Human Interface (HI) panel keypad.

Figure 27. Human interface (HI) panel keypad

Remote Human Interface PanelThe remote human interface (RHI) panel is identical tothe unit mounted HI with the exception of the “unitselect” key. This key allows the operator to switch fromone unit to the next to program or view statusinformation regarding a particular unit.

The RHI functions the same as the unit mounted HIwith two exceptions. The first is the test start function.The operator can view the service parameters, but canonly initiate the service test function at the unit. TheRHI door has a locking screw to deter access byunauthorized personnel. Additionally, the RHI cancontrol up to four different units.

Location RecommendationsThe HI microprocessor module is mounted inside amolded plastic enclosure for surface mounting. It is notweatherproof. Therefore, it is only applicable for indooruse.

Locate the RHI panel in an area that will ensure thecommunication link between the panel and the unit(s)does not exceed 5,000 feet maximum or pass betweenbuildings. See Table 33, p. 51.

The run length of the low voltage AC power wiring tothe remote HI must not exceed three ohms/conductor.Refer to Table 33, p. 51.

Table 32. Maximum communication link wiringlength

Max. Wire LengthMax. Capacitance

Between Conductors

1,000 ft up to 60 pf/ft





Note: pf/ft = picofarads/foot

Ambient Temperature and HumidityLimitsAmbient operating conditions:

• Temperature: 32 to 120°F

• Relative humidity: 10 to 90%, non-condensing

Ambient Storage Conditions

• Temperatures: -50 to 200°F

• Relative humidity: 5 to 95%, non-condensing

Table 33. Wiring recommendations for the remote HIpanel

Distance to Remote HI RecommendedWire Size

0-460 feet 18 gauge



Mounting the Remote HumanInterface (RHI) PanelThe installer must provide all mounting hardware suchas; hand tools, electrical boxes, conduit, screws, etc.Refer to Figure 28, p. 53 for the mounting hole andknockout locations.

ProcedureRefer to Figure 28, p. 53 and follow the procedurebelow for mounting the remote HI panel on a 4" x 4"electrical junction box. Place the microprocessor in aclean dry location during the enclosure mountingprocedures to prevent damage.


52 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

1. Mount an electrical junction box in the wall so thatthe front edge of the box will be flush with thefinished wall surface.

2. Prior to mounting the panel, the microprocessormodule must be carefully removed from theenclosure. To remove the module:

a. Lay the remote panel face up on a flat surfaceand remove the locking screw from the righthand bottom end of the panel.

b. Remove the recessed hinge screw from the lefthand bottom end of the panel.

c. Unlatch the door of the enclosure as if to openit, and slide the left hand side of the doorupward away from the hinge. Lay it aside.

d. With the key pad visible, remove the two screwslocated on the right hand side of the key pad.

e. Carefully slide the key pad plate upward fromthe bottom, releasing the extruded hinge pinfrom its socket at the top.

f. Set the microprocessor aside until mounting iscomplete.

3. Remove the junction box knockout in the back ofthe enclosure.

NNoottee:: The top of the enclosure is marked “TOP.”

4. With the enclosure in the correct position; align themounting holes around the knockout in theenclosure with the screw holes in the electricalhandy box and secure with the appropriate screws.

5. Replace the microprocessor within the enclosure asfollows:

a. Verify that the terminal block jumpers areconnected properly.

b. Slide the extruded hinge pin at the top left of thekey pad plate into the hole located at the top lefthand side of the enclosure.

c. Slide the bottom of the plate into place, aligning

the two clearance holes with the screw holes onthe right. Install the screws but do not tighten.

NNoottee:: If the two screws are not installed ascalled out in the previous step, holdagainst the key pad plate while installingthe door in the next step, to prevent itfrom falling out.

d. Slide the extruded hinge pin at the top left of thedoor into the hole located under the bottom leftside of the display.

e. Install and tighten the hinge screw located at thebottom left side of the enclosure.

Wall Mounting the RHI Panel1. Prior to mounting the panel, the microprocessor

module must be removed from the enclosure.Complete Step 2 in the previous section beforeproceeding.

2. With the microprocessor removed, refer to Figure28, p. 53 for the location of the mounting holes tobe used for wall mounting.

3. Place the enclosure against the mounting surfaceand mark the mounting holes.

NNoottee:: Note: The top of the enclosure is marked with“TOP.”

4. With the enclosure in the correct position, removethe enclosure and drill the necessary holes in thesurface for the appropriate fasteners, (plasticanchors, molly bolts, screws, etc.)

5. Remove the necessary knockouts for the wire orconduit entry before mounting the panel.

6. Place the enclosure back onto the surface andsecure it with the appropriate screws.

7. Follow Step 5 in the previous section to replace themicroprocessor within the enclosure.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 53

Figure 28. Remote HI mounting holes and knockout locations

Wiring the Remote HumanInterface


WWAARRNNIINNGGHHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmootteeddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd wwaaiitt ffoorr DDCC ccaappaacciittoorrss ttooddiisscchhaarrggee bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. RReeffeerr ttoo tthheemmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss rreeccoommmmeennddaattiioonnss ffoorr pprrooppeerrddiisscchhaarrggee ttiimmee aass DDCC bbuuss ccaappaacciittoorrss rreettaaiinnhhaazzaarrddoouuss vvoollttaaggeess aafftteerr iinnppuutt ppoowweerr hhaass bbeeeennddiissccoonnnneecctteedd.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt// ttaaggoouuttpprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbeeiinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVVvvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrsshhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd bbeeffoorree ttoouucchhiinngg aannyy iinntteerrnnaallccoommppoonneennttss..FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffeeddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

The remote human interface requires 24 VAC + 4 voltspower source and a shielded twisted paircommunication link between the remote panel and theinterprocessor communication bridge (ICPB) module atthe self-contained unit.

Field wiring for both the low voltage power and theshielded twisted pair must meet the followingrequirements:

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: To prevent control malfunctions, do not runlow voltage wiring (30 volts or less) inconduit with higher voltage circuits.

• All wiring must be in accordance with NEC and


54 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

local codes.

• Reference Table 33, p. 51 for recommended wiringdistance and size.

• Communication link wiring must be 18 AWGshielded twisted pair (Belden 8760, or equivalent).

• Communication link must not exceed 5,000 feetmaximum for each link. See Table 32, p. 51

• Do not run communication link between buildings.

Low Voltage (AC) Field WiringConnections1. To access the wire entry locations, open the RHI

panel door and remove the two screws on the right-hand side of the key pad.

2. Swing the keypad open, exposing both the wireentries and the back of the HI module.

3. Refer to Figure 28, p. 53 and connect one end of thethree conductor 24 volt wires to the remote panelterminal strip (+), (-), and (ground).

Interprocessor Communication BridgeModule Wiring1. Refer to the figure below and trim the outer

covering of the shielded cable back approximatelyone inch.

2. Cut the bare shield wire off even with the outercovering.

3. Strip approximately 1/2" of insulation from eachinsulated wire in order to connect them to theterminal strip at the unit.

4. Wrap tape around any exposed foil shield and/orbase shield wire.

NNoottee:: The communication link is polarity sensitive.

Figure 29. Dressing shielded twisted wire

Communication Link (Shielded TwistedPair) Wiring1. Trim the outer covering of the shielded cable back

approximately 1 inch. See the “Dressing shieldedtwisted wire” figure above. Do not cut the bareshield wire off.

2. Strip approximately 1/2–inch of insulation fromeach insulated wire to connect them to the terminalstrip at the remote panel.

3. Connect the white lead to the positive (+) terminal,the black lead to the negative (-) terminal, and thebare shield wire to the terminal at the remotehuman interface panel.

4. Close the key pad plate and install and tighten thetwo screws removed earlier.

5. Close the outer door and install the recessedlocking screw at the bottom right hand side of theenclosure to prevent accidental starting of the unitby unauthorized personnel while completing thewiring at the self-contained unit.

At the Self-Contained Unit1. Connect the opposite end of the three conductor 24-

volt wire to the appropriate terminal strip asfollows:

NNoottee:: Although the 24 volt power is not polaritysensitive, do not connect either the + (plus) or- (minus) terminals from the remote panel toground at the self-contained unit.

2. Connect the wire connected to the positive (+)terminal at the remote panel.

3. Connect the wire connected to the negative (-)terminal at the remote panel.

4. Connect the ground wire from the remote panel tothe unit control panel casing.

5. Refer to the unit wiring diagram and connect thewhite lead to the positive (+) terminal and the blacklead to the negative (-) terminal. (These terminalsare numbered. Reference to color is for clarificationto maintain polarity).

NNoottee:: To maintain polarity, do not connect the baseshield wire to ground at the self-containedunit.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 55

Connecting to Tracer Summit

WWAARRNNIINNGGHHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggeeccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorrsseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmootteeddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunnccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerrlloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerrccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. FFoorr vvaarriiaabblleeffrreeqquueennccyy ddrriivveess oorr ootthheerr eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinnggccoommppoonneennttss pprroovviiddeedd bbyy TTrraannee oorr ootthheerrss,, rreeffeerr ttootthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss lliitteerraattuurree ffoorraalllloowwaabbllee wwaaiittiinngg ppeerriiooddss ffoorr ddiisscchhaarrggee ooffccaappaacciittoorrss.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerrrraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavveeddiisscchhaarrggeedd..FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffeeddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

IntelliPak™ commercial self-contained (CSC) unitsoperate with Trane building automation software,Tracer Summit version 10.0.4 or later or any OS2operating system.

NNoottee:: Tape the non-insulated end of the shield onshielded wire at the unit. Any connectionbetween the shield and ground will cause amalfunction. If daisy-chained in the unit, spliceand tape the shields to prevent contact withground.

Communication WiringNNoottee:: Communication link wiring is a shielded, twisted

pair of wire and must comply with applicableelectrical codes.

An optional communication link provides a serialcommunication interface (SCI) between Tracer Summitand each commercial self-contained (CSC) unit in thesystem. The CSC system can have a maximum of 12CSC units per connection link to Tracer Summit. Use asingle 18 AWG shielded, twisted pair wire withstranded, thinned copper conductors to establish eachcommunication link between Tracer Summit and eachunit.

Programming the Time ClockOptionSetting the Time ClockUse the following instructions to set the time clock:

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: Depress the reset key before beginning toset time and program.

1. Select military (24:00 hr.) or AM/PM (12:00 hr.) timemode by depressing and holding the “h” key while

pressing “+ 1h” key to toggle between military andAM/PM. (AM appears in the display when in AM/PMmode.)

2. Press and hold down “🕒” key.

3. If setting the time when daylight savings time is ineffect, press “+ 1h” key once (+ 1h will appear indisplay).

4. Set hour with “h” key. If AM or PM does not appearin display, the unit is in military time. See noteabove to change display.

5. Set minutes with “m” key.

6. Press “Day” key repeatedly to the day of the week.(1 is Monday, 7 is Sunday)

7. Release “🕒” key, colon will begin flashing.

NNoottee:: If keys h + or m + are kept depressed for longerthan 2 seconds, a rapid advance of figures willresult.

The “Digi 20” electronic time switch is freelyprogrammable for each day of the week in one minuteincrements. For easy and quick programming, thefollowing 4 block programs are available:

• Monday through Sunday

• Monday through Saturday

• Monday through Friday

• Saturday and Sunday

Programming the Time ClockUse the following instructions to program the timeclock:

1. Press “Prog.” key. 1234567 AM —:— will appear indisplay. (Pressing “Prog.” key again, display willshow the number of free programs “Fr 20”). Pressagain to RETURN to 1st program.

2. Press “👌”key,“◉” ON symbol will appear. Pressingthe key again will toggle to OFF “❍”. Select ON orOFF for the program.

3. Press “h+” to select hour for switching time.

4. Press “m+” to select minute for switching time.

5. If the program is to occur every day of the week, (24hour time control) ignore “Day” key and press“Prog.” key to advance to program.

6. For 7 day time control, press “Day” key. 1 2 3 4 5 6(Monday through Saturday) block of days appearsin display. Pressing “Day” key again, 1 2 3 4 5(Monday through Friday) appears in display.Repeated presses will cycle through all days of theweek and back to 1 through 7 (Monday throughSunday). Select day or block of days desired.

7. Press “Prog.” key and repeat steps 2 through 6a toenter additional programs of ON and OFF times.(Note that more than one OFF time may beprogrammed, enabling automatic control ormanual overrides.)


56 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

8. Press “🕒” key to enter run mode.

Reviewing and Changing ProgramsUse the following instructions to review and changeprograms:

1. To review a program at any time, press “Prog.” key.Programs display in the sequence they wereentered with repeated presses of “Prog.” key.

2. To change a program, select that program asoutlined in step 1. Enter the time of day and days ofweek just as in the programming steps above.Theold program is overwritten with the new selections.Press “Prog.” to store the new program.

3. To delete an individual program, select the programas in step 1 and press “h” and “m” keys until “—:—” appears in the display. Press either “Prog.” or“¹” key until“—:—” flashes.The program is deletedafter a few seconds.

Manual OverrideWhile in the “run” mode (“🕒” symbol is displayed),pressing the “👌” key will reverse the load status(switch load off if it is on, or switch it on if it is off). Ahand symbol appears in the display to indicate theoverride is active. At the next scheduled switchingtime, automatic time control resumes, eliminating theoverride.

Pressing the “👌” key a second time “◉” appears in thedisplay indicating the load is permanently on.

Pressing the “👌” key a third time “❍” appears in thedisplay indicating the load is permanently off.

Pressing the “👌” key a fourth time returns toautomatic, “👌” appears in the display.

All days shown in the respective blocks will switch on(or off) at the selected hour and minute.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 57

Operating PrinciplesControl Sequences of OperationOccupied/Unoccupied Switching• Night setback zone sensor

• Field-supplied contact closure (hard wired binaryinput to RTM)

• Tracer Summit

• Factory-mounted time clock

Field-Supplied Occupied/UnoccupiedInput on the RTMThis input accepts a field-supplied switch or contactsclosure, such as a time clock, with a rating of 12 mA at24 VDC minimum.

Tracer Summit SystemThe Tracer Summit system can control the occupied/unoccupied status of the self-contained unit.

Factory-Mounted Time ClockA time clock can control the occupied/unoccupiedstatus of the self-contained unit.

Unoccupied Sequence ofOperationThe unoccupied mode helps conserve energy duringtimes when a building is usually unoccupied. When inunoccupied mode, the unit will control to theunoccupied setpoints (usually a lower heating setpointand higher cooling setpoint). Setpoints can beprogrammed at the HI, Tracer Summit, or the nightsetback zone sensor.

The unit enters the unoccupied mode when the RTMreceives a closed signal on the unoccupied input formore than five seconds. For units with supply airtemperature control entering unoccupied mode, thefollowing sequence will occur:

• Heating/cooling functions cease and theeconomizer option closes fully. The supply fanshuts down for proper cool-down time of the heatexchanger. However, the supply fan may remain onfor a short period of time.

• After the supply fan shuts down, the occupied/unoccupied relay energizes, and the VAV box stroketime begins. The VAV box stroke time is fieldadjustable to allow time for VAV boxes to go to thefull open airflow position.

• After the max VAV box stroke time expires, thesupply fan, economizer (if enabled), compressors,and heat are enabled to satisfy the unoccupied zonetemperature setpoints.

NNoottee:: Unoccupied economizer operation can beenabled or disabled at the HI or using TracerSummit.

Figure 30. Typical cycling morning warm-up cycle

MWUVentilationEnable

MorningWarmupTemperature

For units without volume control entering unoccupiedmode, the following sequence will occur:

• The occupied/unoccupied relay energizes and theeconomizer option fully closes.

• The fan mode is set to auto and the unit will controlto the unoccupied zone temperature setpoints.

With MWU enabled at the HI, if the zone temperature isbelow the MWU setpoint, the unit enters the MWUmode.

Morning Warm-upThis feature can be enabled at the HI, and can be usedwith factory- or field-installed heat. If MWU is notrequired disable the function in the setup menu at theHI. MWU transitions the zone from unoccupied tooccupied. It will heat until the MWU setpoint is met.The unit is then released to occupied mode. Supplyduct static pressure is maintained during thissequence. MWU can be set (at the HI) to function aseither full or cycling capacity.

Full Capacity Morning Warm-up (MWU)Full capacity morning warm-up uses full heatingcapacity to heat the zone as quickly as possible. Fullheating capacity is provided until the morning warm-up setpoint is met. At this point, the unit is released todaytime mode.

Cycling Capacity Morning Warm-up(MWU)Cycling capacity morning warm-up provides a moregradual heating to overcome “building sink” as thezone is heated. Normal zone temperature control withvarying capacity is used to raise the zone temperatureto the MWU zone temperature setpoint. This method ofwarm-up is used to overcome the “building sink”effect.

58 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Reference Figure 30, p. 57 for a pictorial explanation ofthe cycling MWU sequence. Cycling capacity MWU willheat until MWU temperature setpoint is reached. Next,a 60-minute timer begins. If the building load reachesthe MWU ventilation setpoint, or the 60 minutes expire,whichever is first, the airside economizer will control tothe minimum position. MWU will end when the zonetemperature rises above the MWU terminate setpoint.

Timed Override Activation—ICS™This function is operational whenever the unit’s RTMmodule is used as the zone temperature sensor source,which can be set at the HI panel. When this function isinitiated by the push of the override button on the zonesensor, the unit will switch to the occupied mode. Unitoperation (occupied mode) during timed override isterminated by a signal from Tracer.

Timed Override Activation—Non-ICSThis function is active whenever the unit’s RTM moduleboard is selected as the zone temperature source,which can be set at the human interface panel. Whenthis function is initiated by the push of the overridebutton on the zone sensor, the unit will switch to theoccupied mode. Automatic cancellation of the timedoverride mode occurs after three hours of operation.

VAV Drive Max OutputThis is a single-pole, double-throw relay rated at amaximum voltage of 24 vac, two amps max. The relaycontacts of this relay switch when the unit goes fromthe occupied mode to the unoccupied mode by meansof the unoccupied binary input, night setback zonesensor, or Tracer Summit. The contacts will stayswitched during the unoccupied and morning warm-upmode. They will return to the position shown on theunit wiring diagram when the unit returns to theoccupied mode. The intent of this binary output is tosignal the VAV boxes or other terminal devices to go toa full open airflow position.

Occupied SequenceAll setpoints can be adjusted using the HI panel. Also,cooling/heating setpoints can be adjusted in the zone, ifusing an adjustable zone sensor. For a complete list ofunit setpoint default values and ranges, see theIntelliPak™ Self-Contained Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01*-EN.

Occupied Zone Temperature—CoolingThe unit transitions from unoccupied to occupied whenthe occupied/unoccupied input on the RTM is open formore than five seconds after having been closed. Thisinput can be received from Tracer Summit, the remoteNSB zone sensor, the timed override function, or a fieldsupplied contact. Dependent on unit options and the HIprogramming, the following sequence will occur:

• The unit will begin MWU and then switch to theoccupied mode after the MWU setpoint is met.

• Purge will be enabled by Tracer Summit. ThenTracer Summit will enable the occupied mode.

• The unit will switch from unoccupied to occupiedcontrol immediately.

Upon entering occupied mode, the occupied/unoccupied relay will de-energize.

Zone Temperature Control (Unit ModelNumber Digit 9 = 4 or 5)A zone sensor located directly in the space sends inputto the RTM while the CV unit is in occupied coolingmode. When the unit is in occupied cooling, the RTMcontrols the zone temperature within the coolingsetpoint deadband by modulating the economizeroption and/or staging mechanical cooling on and off asrequired.

Supply Air Temperature Control (UnitModel Number Digit 9 = 1, 2, 3, or 6)When the VAV unit is in occupied cooling, the RTMcontrols the supply air temperature to the specifiedsupply air cooling setpoint by modulating theeconomizer option and/or staging mechanical coolingon and off as required. The changeover relay contacts(field supplied) must be open on units with hydronicheat for cooling to operate.

CoolingUpon entering occupied mode, the RTM receives aninput from either the HI, RHI, Tracer Summit, or theGBAS to start the supply fan. The RTM supply fancontacts close and energize the supply fan contactor.When the supply fan starts, the fan proving switchcloses, signaling the RTM that airflow is established.The VFD will ramp the fan, and/or the airsideeconomizer dampers will open to the user-definedminimum position.

When a cooling request is sent to the RTM from thezone sensor, the RTM evaluates the system operatingconditions using the supply air and outdoortemperature input before sending the request to theMCM for mechanical cooling. If outdoor conditions(temperature and humidity) are suitable or the EWT iswithin specified setpoints, the RTM will attempt to use“free cooling” without using any compressors. TheRTM will use either the airside or waterside economizeroption. When outdoor air conditions are not suitable,only mechanical cooling will function and outside airdampers will remain at their minimum position. If theunit does not have an economizer, mechanical coolingwill operate to satisfy cooling requirements.

OOppeerraattiinngg PPrriinncciipplleess

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 59

Units With EconomizerIf the entering condenser water temperature (units witha WSE) or the outside air enthalpy (units with an ASE)is appropriate to use “free cooling,” the economizerwill attempt to satisfy the cooling zone temperaturesetpoint.

NNoottee:: When using an ASE with economizer enabled, O/A temperature enable can be used instead ofcomparative enthalpy if the O/A temperaturefalls below the economizer setpoint.

Then compressors will stage on as necessary tomaintain supply air temperature setpoint, which isuser-defined at the HI. Minimum on/off timing ofcompressors prevents rapid cycling.

When both airside and waterside economizers are on asingle unit, priority must be set at the HI. Theeconomizer with the highest priority attempts coolingfirst. Once it is operating at its maximum, and ifadditional cooling is necessary, the other economizerenables before mechanical cooling begins.

Cooling/Waterside EconomizerWaterside economizing enables when the unit’sentering water temperature is below the unit’s enteringmixed air temperature by 4°F plus the user adjustableeconomizer approach temperature. The approachtemperature default is 4°F.

Waterside economizing disables when the unit’sentering water temperature is not below the unit’sentering mixed air temperature by at least the watereconomizer approach temperature (default value of 4°F).The economizer acts as the first stage of cooling. Ifthe economizer is unable to maintain the zone (CVunits) or supply air (VAV units) temperature setpoint,the compressor module will bring on compressors asrequired to meet the setpoint.

Cooling/Airside EconomizerOn units with an airside economizer, a call for coolingwill modulate the fresh air dampers open. The rate ofeconomizer modulation is based on deviation of thezone temperature from setpoint; i.e., the further awayfrom setpoint, the faster the fresh air damper will open.The first stage of cooling will start after the economizerreaches full open.

NNoottee:: The airside economizer will only function freely ifambient conditions are below the enthalpycontrol settings or below the return air enthalpyif unit has comparative enthalpy installed. Ifoutside air is not suitable for “economizing,” thefresh air dampers drive to the minimum openposition. A field adjustable, factory defaultsetting at the HI panel or Tracer Summit canprovide the input to establish the minimumdamper position.

When outdoor air conditions are above the setpoint orcomparative enthalpy control setting, only mechanical

cooling will function and outside air dampers willremain at their minimum position.

Mechanical CoolingIf the zone temperature cannot be maintained withinthe setpoint deadband using the economizer option orif there is no economizer, the RTM sends a coolingrequest to the MCM. The compressor module checksthe compressor protection circuit before closing stageone. After the first functional stage starts, thecompressor module monitors the saturated refrigeranttemperature and closes the condenser fan outputcontact when the saturated refrigerant temperaturerises above the lower limit setpoint.

Air-Cooled Units OnlyThe compressor module closes the condenser fanoutput contact when the saturated refrigeranttemperature rises above the lower limit setpoint.

Water-Cooled Units OnlyThe WSM modulates the condenser coil water valvesto maintain condenser temperature, if applicable.Otherwise, it will check the entering condenser watertemperature to ensure it is greater than 54°F or if not, itwill lock out cooling.

Auto Changeover (Units with Heat Only)When the system mode is in auto, the mode willchange to cooling or heating as necessary to satisfy thezone cooling and heating setpoints. The zone coolingand heating setpoints can be as close as 2°F (1.1°C).

Occupied Zone Temperature—HeatingRelies on input from a sensor directly in the space,while a system is in occupied heating mode or anunoccupied period, to stage electric heat on and off ormodulate the hydronic heating valve as required tomaintain the zone temperature within the heatingsetpoint deadband. The supply fan will operate whenthere is a request for heat.

Electric HeatOn units with electric heat, the zone temperature canbe controlled to a heating setpoint during the occupiedmode by cycling a single stage electric heater. Aninterface can be provided for field supplied electric heat(up to three stages).The zone temperature heatingsetpoint and deadband are user defined at the HI panel.

Hydronic Heat: Hot Water or SteamOn units with hot water or steam heating, the zonetemperature can be controlled to a heating setpointduring the occupied mode. The zone temperatureheating setpoint and deadband are user defined at theHI panel or zone sensor. VAV occupied heating initiatesby closing a field-supplied switch or relay contacts


60 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

connected to the changeover input on the RTM. Supplyair static pressure is maintained.

Supply Air Setpoint Reset (VAV UnitsOnly)Supply air reset can be used to adjust the supply airtemperature setpoint on the basis of a zonetemperature or outdoor air temperature. Supply airreset adjustment is available at the HI panel for supplyair heating and supply air cooling control.

Reset Based on Outdoor AirTemperatureOutdoor air cooling reset is sometimes used inapplications where the outdoor temperature has alarge effect on building load. When the outside airtemperature is low and the building cooling load is low,the supply air setpoint can be raised, therebypreventing subcooling of critical zones. This reset canlower usage of mechanical cooling, thus savings incompressor kW, but an increase in supply fan kW mayoccur.

Outdoor air heating reset is the inverse of cooling, withthe same principles applied.

For both outdoor air cooling reset and heating reset,there are three user defined parameters that areadjustable through the human interface panel:

• Beginning reset temperature

• Ending reset temperature

• Maximum amount of temperature reset

Reset Based on zone temperatureZone reset is applied to the zone(s) in a building thattends to overcool or overheat. The supply airtemperature setpoint is adjusted based on thetemperature of the critical zone(s).This can have theeffect of improving comfort and/or lowering energyusage. The user-defined parameters are the same asfor outdoor air reset.

Supply AirTempering (Hot Water andSteam VAV Units Only)When supply air temperature falls below the supply airtemperature deadband low end, the heating valvemodulates open to maintain the minimum supply airtemperature setpoint.

Daytime Warm-up (Units with Supply AirTemperature Control Only)During occupied mode, if the zone temperature falls toa preset, user-defined zone low limit temperaturesetpoint, the unit is put into daytime warm-up. Thesystem changes over to CV heating, the VAV boxesdrive full open. However, unit airflow modulationcontrol operates to maintain duct static setpoint, andfull heating capacity is provided until the daytime

warm-up setpoint is reached. The unit is then returnedto normal occupied mode.

Supply AirTemperingSupply air tempering is available on units withoutvolume control and with hot water, steam, or electricheat or units with supply air temperature control withsteam or electric heat. When the unit is in heat modebut not actively heating, if the supply air temperaturedrops to 10°F (5.5°C) below the occupied zone heatingtemperature setpoint, electric heat will stage on or thehydronic valve will modulate to maintain a minimumsupply air temperature. The unit transitions out of heatmode if the supply air temperature rises to 10°F (5.5°C)above the occupied zone heating temperature setpoint.

ChangeoverThis mode only functions on units with supply airtemperature control with hydronic heat. When thechangeover binary input is closed the unit will controlto a discharge air heating setpoint. This setpoint isentered from the HI, and can be a higher temperaturethan the supply air cooling setpoint. This functionmaintains duct static pressure.

Thermostatic Expansion ValveNNOOTTIICCEE

CCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!DDoo nnoott ooppeerraattee wwiitthh wwaatteerr llooooppss wwiitthh lleessss tthhaann ffiivveemmiinnuutteess cciirrccuullaattiioonn ttiimmee aass iitt ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ppoooorrssuuppeerrhheeaatt ccoonnttrrooll aanndd ccoommpprreessssoorr ddaammaaggee..

Refrigerant system reliability and performance isheavily dependent upon proper superheat. Theimportance of maintaining the proper superheatcannot be overemphasized. Accurate measurements ofsuperheat will provide the following information:

• How well the expansion valve is controlling therefrigerant flow.

• The efficiency of the evaporator coil.

• The amount of protection the compressor isreceiving against flooding.

The expected range for superheat is 14-20°F at full loadconditions. At part load, expect a properly adjustedexpansion valve to control to 8-12°F superheat.Systems operating with lower superheat could causeserious compressor damage due to refrigerantfloodback.

CompressorsUnits use two sizes of hermetic scroll compressors, 10and 15 hp, and have from two to six compressors.When viewing the front of the unit, compressors areidentified A through F from left to right. The secondcompressor from the left, or B compressor, is always


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 61

the first to come on, unless locked out for amalfunction or shut off on frost protection. See Table34, p. 62 for compressor cycling stages and Table 1, p.14 and Table 2, p. 15 for percent cooling capacity bystage.

R-410 compressors have belly band heaters that mustbe energized 24 hours before starting compressor.Power to the unit will energize the heaters. Heaters willbe energized during the off-cycle as long as the unithas power. Failure to perform these pre-startinstructions could result in compressor damage.

The control system logic permits compressor operationonly after the supply fan is on. If the supply fan shutsdown, compressors will not operate. Units withouthead pressure control (units with intermediate pipingpackages) will lock out mechanical cooling when theentering condenser water temperature falls below 54°F.Mechanical cooling will resume when the enteringcondenser water temperature exceeds 58°F.

When there are more than two compressors in an aircooled unit, the first two compressors are manifoldedtogether. If there are four compressors, the second twoare manifolded.

Compressor CyclingCompressors cycle to maintain the operating staterequired by the temperature controls. In the event of acompressor failure, the next available compressorturns on. Refer to Table 34, p. 62 for compressorcycling by unit model and tons.

During normal conditions, compressors will not shutoff until they have been on for at least three minutesand will not turn on until they have been off for at leastthree minutes. Normal operating conditions areestablished on an individual compressor basis. When acompressor starts, its timer also starts. The compressorevaporator circuit frost protection can override the“minimum” timer and reduce the five minuteminimum required time period.

When the unit is powered up, or manually reset therewill be a three to eight minute delay before the firstcompressor may be turned on as requested by the unittemperature control algorithm.

Compressor Lead/Lag OperationCompressor lead/lag is a user-selectable feature at theHI panel and is available on all units. After each requestfor compressor operation, the lead refrigeration circuitor compressor switches, thereby causing a moreequitable or balanced run time among compressors.

When lead/lag is enabled, each time the system cycles,it will alternate between the standard compressorstaging and the lead/lag staging. Using Table 34, p. 62,a SXWF 29-ton unit will first stage compressor B thenA, then AB for

first cycle and A, then AB for the second cycle.Appropriate condenser valves (water-cooled andcondenser fans (air-cooled) will stage with appropriatecompressors to maintain saturated condensingtemperature. Enabling lead/lag may drop a coolingstage when compared to standard staging. See Table34, p. 62 for compressor staging.

Step ControlSteps of mechanical cooling are control based onsupply air or zone temperature. See Table 34, p. 62 forcompressor staging.

Capacity is based on an integrating control concept.The unit capacity matches the existing load andmaintains an average supply air temperature within thesupply air setpoint temperature control band region.

The supply air temperature control band is centeredaround supply air temperature setpoint and isadjustable from 2 to 12°F. In a steady state, the unit willeither maintain a constant level of cooling capacitywith the supply air temperature within the controlband, or the highest active cooling level will cycle toprovide an average supply air temperature equal to thesetpoint.

If the supply air temperature swings outside the limitsof the control band, the mechanical cooling capacitywill increase or decrease by one level accordingly. Thechange occurs by integrating the temperature offsetfrom the control band limit.

A minimum time delay of five minutes follows eachchange in cooling level. This time delay promotesstability by allowing the system to respond to thechange before any further control action occurs. As thesupply air temperature approaches setpoint, the timeduration between changing levels of cooling capacityincreases.

See Figure 31, p. 62 for the typical unit operating curve.Figure 32, p. 62 shows typical unit performance whensupply air temperature swings exceed the control bandlimits.

Adjust the supply air temperature control bandaccording to the desired unit performance. Increasingthe control band reduces the equipment cycle rate andincreases the maximum potential supply airtemperature deviation from setpoint. Conversely,decreasing the control band reduces the maximumpotential temperature deviation, but increases thecompressor cycle rate.

Follow these recommendations concerning the supplyair temperature control band settings based onexpected unit sizing:

• 2 Cooling stage unit: 9°F




62 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Table 34. Compressor stages

Unit SizeRefrigerantCircuit Type

Compressor by Stage

Compressor Staging Compressor StagingA B C D E F

SXWF 20, 22, 25 Independent 10 10 B/AB A/AB

SXWF 29, 32SXRF 25, 29 Independent 15 10 B/A/AB A/AB

SXWF 35, 38 Independent 10 10 10 B/BC/ABC A/AC/ABC

SXRF 30, 35 Manifolded 10 10 10 B/BC/ABC A/AC/ABC

SXWF 42, 46 Independent 15 10 10 B/A/AC/ABC C/AC/ABC

SXRF 40 Manifolded 15 10 10 B/A/AC/ABC C/AC/ABC

SXWF 52, 58 Independent 15 15 15 B/BC/ABC A/AC/ABC

SXRF 50 Manifolded 15 15 15 B/BC/ABC A/AC/ABC

SXWF 65, 72 Independent 15 15 15 10 B/BD/ABD/ABCD A/AD/ACD/ABCD

SXWF 80 Independent 15 15 15 15 B/BD/ABD/ABCD A/AC/ABC/ABCD

SXRF 60 Manifolded 15 15 15 15 B/BD/ABD/ABCD A/AC/ABC/ABCD

SCWF 90 Independent 15 15 15 15 15 A/AB/ABC/ABCDE C/CDE/ACDE/BCDEF

SCWF 100 Independent 15 15 15 15 10 10 A/AB/ABCD/ABCDEF CD/CDEF/ACDEF/ABCDEF

SCWF C1 Independent 15 15 15 15 15 15 A/AB/ABCD/ABCDEF CD/CDEF/ACDEF/ABCDEF

Figure 31. Typical pulldown curve for unit operatingproperly within control band

Figure 32. Typical pulldown curve for unit operatingimproperly outside control band

Compressor Safety DevicesIf a compressor low pressure cutout opens duringcompressor startup, the UCM will not shut the

compressor off during the first two to three minutesafter startup. This prevents possible nuisance tripsduring low ambient start conditions. See Table 35, p.62.

Each compressor’s discharge line contains a highpressure cutout. Under abnormal operating conditions,the cutout will open to stop compressor operation.

Table 35. Pressure cutouts (open/close)

Unit ModelHigh Pressure

CutoutLow Pressure

Cutout

SXWF 553/424 49/74

SXRF 650/500 36/61

Low Ambient Compressor LockoutThis function will lock out the compressor if theoutdoor air temperature sensor reads an outdoortemperature below the low ambient compressorlockout temperature setpoint. This setpoint isadjustable at the human interface panel. Compressorswill lock out when outdoor air temperature falls belowthat selected temperature and will start again when thetemperature rises 5°F above the setpoint.

Evaporator Coil Frost ProtectionFROSTATThe FROSTAT™ system eliminates the need for hot gasbypass. It utilizes an evaporator temperature sensor


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 63

mounted on the suction line near the TXV bulb of eachcircuit to protect the evaporator from freezing.

If the evaporator temperature approaches the specifiedsetpoint (adjustable between 25 and 35°F at the HI) thecompressor(s) will cycle off. The supply fan remains onto help de-ice the coil. The compressors will restartwhen the evaporator temperature has risen 10°F abovethe specified cutout temperature and when thecompressor(s) have been off a minimum of threeminutes. This prevents rapid cycling of thecompressors.

Service Valve OptionIf ordered, service valves are factory installed on eachcircuit before and after the compressor to allowcompressor isolation for servicing.

Waterside ComponentsWaterside components consist of water piping, watervalves, water flow switch option, water cooledcondensers (SXWF only), and the economizer option.

Water Purge


This user-definable feature allows the user to select apurge schedule to automatically circulate waterthrough the economizer and condensers periodicallyduring non-operational times. This allows freshchemicals to circulate in waterside heat exchangers.This feature is on all units and is defined at the HI.

Water Piping OptionsWater piping is factory-installed with left-handconnections on units without a waterside economizer.Units can be ordered with either basic piping orintermediate piping. Also, units with watersideeconomizers can be set for either variable or constantwater flow at the HI. See Figure 33, p. 64 and Figure34, p. 64 for detailed piping configuration information.

With compatible piping configurations, the unit can beconfigured to provide:

• Constant water flow with basic or intermediatepipingor

• Variable water flow (head pressure control) withintermediate piping only.

Constant water flow is for condenser pumping systemsthat are not capable of unloading the water-pumpingsystem. Variable water flow maximizes energy savingby unloading the water pumping system.

Basic Water PipingThis option is available on units without a watersideeconomizer and with condenser water applicationsabove 54°F (12.2°C) that do not require condensingpressure control. Left hand water connections andpiping are extended to the unit exterior. Manifoldpiping is factory installed.

Intermediate Water PipingThis option provides condensing temperature controlwhen the unit is configured (user defined at the HI) forvariable water flow with or without a watersideeconomizer. A two-way modulating control valve iswired and installed in the unit to maintains a specificrange of water temperature rise through the condenserwhen entering fluid temperature is less than 58°F (15°C).This option allows the compressor to operate withentering fluid temperature down to 35°F (2°C).Theminimum valve position to maintain minimumcondenser flow rates is user-defined at the HI. Thisvalve drives closed if the unit shuts down or if a powerfailure occurs.

Water Flow Switch OptionA water flow switch is factory installed in thecondenser water pipe within the unit. Whenever theflow switch detects a water flow loss prior to or duringmechanical cooling, compressor operation locks outand a diagnostic code displays. If water flow isrestored, the compressor operation automaticallyrestores.

Water-Cooled CondensersUnits that are set up for variable water flow willmodulate a water valve to maintain a user-definedcondensing temperature setpoint. Condensingtemperature will be referenced utilizing factoryinstalled sensors located at each condenser.

Table 36. Condenser water piping connection sizes

Unit size Inlet pipeOutletpipe

SXWF 20, 22, 25, 29, 32, 35, 38 2 1/2 NPT 2 1/2 NPT

SXWF 42, 46, 52, 58, 65, 72, 80,90, 100, 110 3 NPT 3 NPT

Waterside Economizer OptionThe waterside economizer option takes advantage ofcooling tower water to either precool the entering air to


64 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

aid the mechanical cooling process or, if the watertemperature is low enough, provide total systemcooling. Waterside economizing enables when theunit’s entering water temperature is below the unit’sentering mixed air temperature by a minimum of 4°Fplus the economizer’s approach temperature. Theapproach temperature default is 4°F. Watersideeconomizing disables when the unit’s entering watertemperature is not below the unit’s entering mixed airtemperature by at least the water economizer approachtemperature. The approach temperature defaults to 4°F. The economizer acts as the first stage of cooling. Ifthe economizer is unable to maintain the supply airsetpoint, the unit control module brings oncompressors as required to meet the setpoint.

The waterside economizer includes a coil, modulatingvalves, controls, and piping with cleanouts. The coilconstruction is ½-inch (13 mm) OD seamless coppertubes expanded into aluminum fins. The evaporatorand economizer coils share a common sloped (IAQ)drain pan. Drain pan options are either galvanized orstainless steel, and are insulated and internallytrapped.

The waterside economizer coil is available with either atwo or four row coil, with no more than 12 fins per inch.

The tubes are arranged in a staggered pattern tomaximize heat transfer. The coil has round coppersupply and return headers with removable cleanoutand vent plugs. The optional mechanical cleanableeconomizer has removable cast iron headers to alloweasy mechanical cleaning of the tubes. The watersideworking pressure is rated for 400 psig (2758 kPa).

Waterside Economizer Flow ControlUnits equipped with a waterside economizer can be setfrom the human interface panel for variable or constantwater flow.

Constant Water Flow with IntermediatePipingTwo-way modulating control shutoff valves are wired,controlled, and installed in unit. One valve is located ineconomizer’s water inlet, and the other in condenserbypass water inlet. When waterside economizerenables, two-way valves modulate to maintaindischarge air temperature setpoint. As economizervalve opens, condenser bypass valve closes, and viceversa. Full water flow is always maintained throughcondensers. Both valves will close in event of a powerfailure.

Variable Water Flow with IntermediatePipingTwo-way modulating control shutoff valves are wired,controlled, and installed in the unit. One valve islocated in the economizer’s water inlet, and the other isin the condenser water inlet. The economizer valve and

the condenser bypass valve modulate in- dependentlyof each other. When the economizer valve is active, allthe water flowing through the economizer exits into thecondensers. The software reads the saturatedcondenser water temperature for each circuit; trying tomaintain 100 degrees saturated condensertemperature. Whichever circuit is the furthest away(either above 120 degrees or below 80 degrees) drivesthe software to modulate the condenser bypass valveeither towards open or towards closed respectively.Eventually a balance will be reached until the saturatedcondenser temperatures change again. Both valvesclose whenever mechanical cooling is not required,and in the event of a power failure.

If the unit does not have a waterside economizer thenvariable water flow is automatically active withintermediate piping.

Figure 33. Basic water piping, constant water flow

Condenser 1

Condenser 2

Condenser 3

Condenser 4

Figure 34. Intermediate water piping, variable waterflow (L) and Intermediate piping with watersideeconomizer, variable or constant water flow (R)

Condenser 1

Condenser 2

Condenser 3

Condenser 4

V2 V2

Condenser 1

Condenser 2

Condenser 3

Condenser 4

V1

Economizer

Variable Water Flow Waterside EconomizerVariable or Constant Water Flow


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 65

Unit Airside ComponentsThe air delivery system consists of dampers, enthalpyswitch option, airside economizer option, filters, lowambient sensors, and factory mounted single or doublewall plenums.

Supply Air FanThe unit has two supply fans on a single shaft that runat a constant speed (CV). However, the fans may have

the VFD option with supply air temperature control(VAV) that modulates airflow based on supply air ductstatic pressure. Pressing the stop key on the HI will turnthe supply fan off. The fan is on continuously when aCV unit is in occupied mode and except when a unit isin the night heat/morning warm-up mode. During thenight heat and setback mode the fan cycles on and offin response to a call for heat.See supply fan tablebelow for available fan horsepower.

Table 37. Supply fan horsepower selections

Unit Model HP

SXRF SXWF 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60

20, 22, 25 X X X X X

25, 29 29, 32 X X X X X

30, 35 35, 38 X X X X X X

40 42, 46 X X X X X X

50 52, 58, 65 X X X X X X

60 72, 80 X X X X X X X

90, 100, 110 X X X X X X X

Low Entering Air Temperature SensorThis is standard on all units with a hydronic coil orwaterside economizer. It can also be ordered as anoption.

A thermostat limit switch is factory mounted on theentering air side of the unit with a capillary tubeserpentine across the coil face. If the temperature fallsbelow 35°F (2°C), the fan shuts down and the watersideeconomizer and/or hydronic heat valve options open toallow full water flow. The heat output also energizes. Amanual reset is required. The low entering airtemperature setpoint is adjustable at the HI.

High Duct Temperature ThermostatA factory-supplied temperature limit switch with resetelement detects the supply air duct temperature. Thissensor should be field-installed downstream from thedischarge in the supply air duct. If the supply air ducttemperature exceeds 240°F (115.6°C), the unit shutsdown and displays a diagnostic. A manual reset isrequired at the unit. High duct temperature can beadjusted at thermostat.

Dirty Filter Sensor OptionA factory installed pressure switch senses the pressuredifferential across the filters. When the differentialpressure exceeds 0.9 inches (23 mm) WG, contactclosure occurs and the HI will display a diagnostic. Theunit will continue to run until you replace the air filters.

A field installed indicator device may be wired to relayterminals to indicate when filter service is required.

Contacts are rated at 115 VAC and are powered by afield-supplied transformer.

Low Ambient Sensor (Air-Cooled Units)Low ambient sensor is field-installed on air-cooledunits. Position it in a location subject to ambienttemperatures only and not exposed to direct sunlightor exhaust fans.

The low pressure cutout initiates based on the ambienttemperature. A time delay on the low pressure cutoutinitiates for ambient temperatures between 50 (zerominutes) and 0°F (10 minutes).This helps to preventnuisance low pressure cutout trips.

Supply Air Static Pressure LimitThe opening of the VAV boxes coordinate during unitstartup and transition to/from occupied/unoccupiedmodes to prevent supply air duct over pressurization.However, if for any reason the supply air pressureexceeds the user-defined supply air static pressurelimit set at the HI panel, the supply fan VFD shutsdown. The unit will attempt to restart, up to threetimes. If the over pressurization condition still occurson the third restart, the unit shuts down and a manualreset diagnostic sets and displays at the HI.

Variable Frequency Drive OptionVariable frequency drive (VFD) is driven by amodulating 0-10 vdc signal from the RTM module. Apressure transducer measures duct static pressure, andthe VFD adjusts fan speed to maintain the supply air


66 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

static pressure within an adjustable user-defined range.The range is determined by the supply air pressuresetpoint and supply air pressure dead band, which areset at the HI panel.

VFDs provide supply fan motor speed modulation. Thedrives will accelerate or decelerate as required tomaintain the supply air static pressure setpoint.

VFD with BypassBypass control is an option that provides full nominalairflow in the event of drive failure. The user mustinitiate the bypass mode at the HI panel. When inbypass mode, VAV boxes need to be fully open. Theself-contained unit will control heating and coolingfunctions to maintain setpoint from a user-defined zonesensor. Supply air static pressure limit is active in thismode.

For more detailed information on VFD operation,reference VFD technical manual that ships with theunit.

Airside Economizer OptionUnits with the airside economizer option are equippedwith the necessary control sequences to use outside airfor the first stage of cooling, in occupied or unoccupiedmode and when ambient conditions are favorable foreconomizing. Inherent in the unit controller is theability to suppress the setpoint below the normal unitsetpoint. This allows the building to improve comfortlevels when possible, and at the same time, optimizebuilding mechanical cooling operation for peakoperating efficiency. An outside air temperature andrelative humidity sensor are provided to allowmonitoring of reference enthalpy and are fieldinstalled.

If the unit has the ECEM board, economizer operationenables when the outside air enthalpy is less than 25BTUs/lb. default (adjustable 19-28 BTUs/lb). Duringoccupied mode, the outside air damper opens to 15%(adjustable 0-100% at the HI) for ventilation purposes.Also, the ability to alter the outside air damper positionto compensate for VAV supply air modulation isinherent in the unit controls, and can be enabled by theoperator.

If the unit does not have an ECEM board, it willeconomize when the O/A temperature falls below theO/A economizer setpoint.

The mixing box fabrication is galvanized steel.Opposed low leak damper blades are fabricated fromgalvanized steel and rotate on rustproof nylonbushings. A factory installed 24V modulating springreturn actuator controls both damper positions.

When outdoor conditions are not suitable foreconomizer cooling, the enthalpy control disables theeconomizer function and permits the outdoor airdamper to open only to the minimum position.

On water-cooled units, compressor operation lockoutwill not occur at low ambient air temperatures.However, lockout will still occur via low condenserwater temperature.

The outdoor air dampers drive fully closed wheneverthe supply air fan is off, provided there is power to theunit.

Comparative Enthalpy ControlComparative enthalpy controls the economizeroperation and measures temperature and humidity ofboth return air and outside air to determine whichsource has lower enthalpy. This allows truecomparison of outdoor air and return air enthalpy bymeasurement of outdoor air and return airtemperatures and humidities. A factory-installedcontrol board, with field-installed outside and return airtemperature and relative humidity sensors, allowsmonitoring of outside and return air.

NNoottee:: If comparative enthalpy is not ordered, standardmethod is to compare outdoor air enthalpy withthe fixed reference enthalpy. The referenceenthalpy is set through the human interfacepanel.

Units with comparative enthalpy control are equippedwith the necessary control sequences to allow usingoutside air for the first stage of cooling, in occupied orunoccupied mode and when ambient conditions arefavorable for economizing. Inherent in the unitcontroller is the ability to suppress the setpoint belowthe normal unit setpoint. This allows building toimprove comfort levels when possible, and at the sametime, optimize building mechanical cooling operationfor peak efficiency.

Economizer operation enables when the outside airenthalpy is 3 BTU/lb less than the return air enthalpy.During occupied mode, the outside air damper opensto 15% (adjustable 0-100%) for ventilation purposes.Also, the ability to alter the outside air damper positionto compensate for VAV supply air modulation isinherent in the unit controls, and can be enabled by theoperator.

The mixing box fabrication is galvanized steel.Opposed low leak damper blades are fabricated fromgalvanized steel and rotate on rustproof nylonbushings. A factory installed 24V modulating springreturn actuator controls both damper positions.

Airside Economizers with Traq DamperOutside air enters the unit through the Traq™ damperassembly and is measured by velocity pressure flowrings. The velocity pressure flow rings are connected toa pressure transducer/solenoid assembly, whichcompensates for temperature swings that could affectthe transducer. The ventilation control module (VCM)utilizes the velocity pressure input, the RTM outdoor airtemperature input, and the minimum outside air cfm


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 67

setpoint to modify the volume (cfm) of fresh airentering the unit as the measured airflow deviates fromsetpoint.

When the optional preheat temperature sensor isinstalled at the auxiliary temperature on the VCM andthe preheat function is enabled, the sensor will monitorthe combined (averaged) fresh air and return airtemperatures. As this mixed air temperature fallsbelow the preheat actuate temperature setpoint, theVCM activates the preheat binary output to control afield-installed heater. The output deactivates when thetemperature rises 5°F above the preheat actuatetemperature setpoint.

Using a field-installed CO2 sensor with CO2 resetenabled, as the CO2 concentration increases above theCO2 reset start value, the VCM modifies the minimumoutside air cfm setpoint to increase the amount of freshair entering the unit. The setpoint adjusts upward untilreaching the CO2 maximum reset value. The maximumeffective (reset) setpoint value for fresh air is limited tothe system’s operating cfm. As the CO2 concentrationdecreases, the effective (reset) setpoint value adjustsdownward toward the minimum outside air cfmsetpoint. See CO2 reset figure below for an airflow cfmvs. CO2 concentration curve.

Figure 35. CO2 reset function, outside air vs. CO2

IncreasingConcentration

Carbon Dioxide Reset

MaximumAirflow

IncreasingReset Amount

O.A CFMSetpoint

Carbon DioxideReset Start

Carbon DioxideMaximum Reset

Standard Two-Position Damper InterfaceUnits with the two-position damper interface areprovided with a 0-10 VDC control output suitable forcontrolling a field-provided modulating actuator. Inoccupied mode, the output drives to the maximumposition.

Airside Economizer InterfaceUnits with airside economizer interface are equippedwith the necessary control sequences to allow usingoutside air for first stage of cooling, in occupied orunoccupied mode and when ambient conditions arefavorable for economizing. Inherent in unit controller isthe ability to suppress setpoint below normal unitsetpoint. This allows the building to improve comfortlevels when possible, and at the same time, optimize

building mechanical cooling operation for peakoperating efficiency. An outside air temperature andrelative humidity sensor are provided for fieldinstallation to monitor reference enthalpy. Economizeroperation enables when the outside air enthalpy is lessthan 25 BTu/lb (adjustable 19-28 BTu/lb.). Duringoccupied mode, the outside air damper opens to 15%(adjustable 0-100%) for ventilation purposes. Also, theability to alter the outside air damper position tocompensate for VAV supply air modulation is inherentin the unit controls, and can be enabled by theoperator. An analog 2-10VDC output (adjustable (0-10VDC) is provided to modulate the field-provided 30second damper actuators (adjustable 1-255 seconds).

Airside Economizer Interface withComparative EnthalpyUnits with airside economizer interface andcomparative enthalpy are equipped with the necessarycontrol sequences to allow using outside air for the firststage of cooling, in occupied or unoccupied mode andwhen ambient conditions are favorable foreconomizing. Inherent in the unit controller is theability to suppress the setpoint below the normal unitsetpoint. This allows the building to improve comfortlevels when possible, and at the same time, optimizebuilding mechanical cooling operation for peakoperating efficiency. A factory-installed control board,with outside and return air temperature and relativehumidity sensors, are provided for monitoring outsideand return air. The sensors are field installed.Economizer operation enables when the outside airenthalpy is 3 BTU’s/lb. less than the return air enthalpy.During occupied mode, the outside air damper opensto 15% (adjustable 0-100%) for ventilation purposes.Also, the ability to alter the outside air damper positionto compensate for VAV supply air modulation isinherent in the unit controls, and can be enabled by theoperator. An analog 2-10 VDC output (adjustable (0-10VDC) is provided to modulate the field-provided 30-second damper actuators (adjustable 1-255 seconds).

Air-Cooled CondensersModel SXRFunits are designed for use with the remoteair-cooled condenser, model CXRC. For moreinformation, see the Installation, Owner, andMaintenance Manual for Air-cooled Condenser, CXRC-SVX01*-EN. See for CXRC refrigerant connection sizes.

Condenser fans will stage per a user-defined setting. Ifthe condenser is equipped with head pressure control(air modulation on last stage of condenser capacity),the condenser airflow will modulate to maintaincondensing temperature setpoint. Condensingtemperature is determined by sensors located at eachcondenser coil.


68 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

ControlsPoints ListRTMModule

Binary Inputs• Emergency stop

• External auto/stop

• Unoccupied/occupied

• Dirty filter

• VAV changeover with hydronic heat

Binary Outputs• VAV box drive max (VAV units only)

• CV unoccupied mode indicator (CV units only)

• Alarm

• Fan run request

• Water pump request (water-cooled only)

Analog Input• Airside economizer damper minimum position

Analog Output• Outside air damper actuator

Heat Module:• Analog output

GBAS Module

Binary Inputs• Demand limit contacts

Binary Outputs• Dirty filter relay

• Refrigeration fail relay

• Heat fail relay

• Supply fan fail relay

• Active diagnostics

Analog inputs• Occupied zone cooling setpoint

• Occupied zone heating setpoint

• Unoccupied zone cooling setpoint

• Unoccupied zone heating setpoint or minimumoutside air flow setpoint

• Supply air cooling setpoint

• Supply air heating setpoint

• Supply air static pressure setpoint

ECEMModule

Analog Inputs• Return air temperature

• Return air humidity

IInn aaddddiittiioonn,, uunniittss wwiitthh aa VVOOMM hhaavvee::

Binary Inputs• VOM mode A, unit off

• VOM mode B, pressurize

• VOM mode C, exhaust

• VOM mode D, purge

• VOM mode E, purge w/duct pressure control

Binary Output• V.O. relay

BCI-I optionFor BACnet® Points List. refer to ACC-SVP01*-EN.

LCI-I Points ListRefer to the LonTalk™ Communications Interface forIntellipak and Commercial Self-Contained IntegrationGuide, BAS-SVP02*-EN.

Phase MonitorUnit is equipped with phase monitor in control box.The phase monitor will protect against phase loss,imbalance and reversal of line voltage. If a fault occurs,the red LED will energize. While the fault condition ispresent, the phase monitor interrupts the 115V controlcircuit. If no faults are observed, a green LED will beenergized.

Unit Control ComponentsThe self-contained unit is controlled by amicroelectronic control system that consists of anetwork of modules. These modules are referred to asunit control modules (UCM). In this manual, theacronym UCM refers to the entire control systemnetwork.

These modules perform specific unit functions usingproportional/integral control algorithms. They aremounted in the unit control panel and are factory wiredto their respective internal components. Each modulereceives and interprets information from other unitmodules, sensors, remote panels, and customer binarycontacts to satisfy the applicable request; i.e.,economizing, mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation.

Following is a detailed description of each module’sfunction.

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 69

RTMModule Board—Standard on allUnitsThe RTM responds to cooling, heating, and ventilationrequests by energizing the proper unit componentsbased on information received from other unitmodules, sensors, remote panels, and customersupplied binary inputs. It initiates supply fan, exhaustfan, exhaust damper, or variable frequency driveoutput, and airside economizer operation based on thatinformation.

Reference the RTM points list on page 70.

NNoottee:: Emergency stop and external auto/stop, stop theunit immediately, emergency stop generates amanual reset diagnostic that must be reset at theunit human interface. External auto-stop willreturn the unit to the current operating modewhen the input is closed, so this input is autoreset.

RTM Remote Economizer Minimum PositionThe remote minimum position potentiometer,BAYSTAT023A, provides a variable resistance (0-270ohms) to adjust the economizer minimum positionfrom 0 to 100% when connected to the economizerremote minimum position input of the RTM. The RTMmust be selected as the source for economizerminimum position. If the RTM is the selected source foreconomizer minimum position, and if a valid resistanceper the table below is provided to the RTM remoteminimum position input, the OA cfm compensationfunction will not operate, even if enabled. “Default” isthe only possible source for economizer minimumposition when using the OA cfm compensationfunction.

Table 38. Economizer remote minimum positioninput resistance

Input Resistance Economizer Min. Position

0 - 30 ohms 0%

30 - 240 ohms 0-100% (linear)

240 - 350 ohms 100%

> 350 ohms N/A

Note: A resistance greater than 350 ohms is assumed to be anopen circuit. The system will use the default minimumposition value.

RTM Analog OutputsThe RTM has two 0-10 Vdc outputs: one for the supplyfan and one for the economizer option. These outputsprovide a signal for one or two damper actuators.There are no terminal strip locations associated withthese wires. They go directly from pins on RTM circuitboard to actuator motor.

RTM Binary OutputsThe RTM has an output with pressure switch provinginputs for the supply fan. There is a 40 second delayfrom when the RTM starts the supply fan until the fanproving input must close. A fan failure diagnostic willoccur after 40 seconds. This is a manual resetdiagnostic, and all heating, cooling, and economizerfunctions will shut down. If this proving input isjumped, other nuisance diagnostics will occur. If theproving input fails to close in 40 seconds, theeconomizer cycles to the minimum position. This is amanual reset diagnostic. External control of the fan isnot recommended.

VAV Drive Max OutputThis is a single-pole, double-throw relay rated at amaximum voltage of 24 Vac, two amps. The relaycontacts of this relay switch when the unit goes fromthe occupied mode to the unoccupied mode by meansof the occupied binary input. The contacts will stayswitched during the unoccupied and morning warm-upmode. They will return to the position shown on theunit wiring diagram when the unit returns to theoccupied mode. This binary output signals the VAVboxes or other terminal devices to go full open.

RTM Alarm RelayThis is a single pole, double throw relay rated at amaximum voltage of 24 Vac, two amps max. Relaycontacts can be programmed from the unit humaninterface. This relay can be programmed to pick up onany one or group of diagnostics from the unit humaninterface.

Status/Annunciator OutputThe status annunciator output is an internal functionwithin the RTM module on CV and VAV units. Itprovides:

• Diagnostic and mode status signals to the remotepanel (LEDs) and to the Human Interface.

• Control of the binary alarm output on the RTM.

• Control of the binary outputs on the GBAS moduleto inform the customer of the operational statusand/or diagnostic conditions.

Occupied/Unoccupied InputsThere are four (4) ways to switch to occupied/unoccupied:

• Field-supplied contact closure hard wired binaryinput to the RTM.

• Programmable night setback zone sensor.

• Tracer Summit.

• Factory-mounted time clock.

VAV Changeover ContactsThese contacts are connected to the RTM whendaytime heating on VAV units with internal or external

CCoonnttrroollss

70 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

hydronic heat is required. Daytime (occupied) heatingswitches the system to a CV unit operation. Refer to theunit wiring diagram for the field connection terminalsin the unit control panel. The switch must be rated at 12mA @ 24 Vdc minimum.

External Auto/Stop SwitchA field-supplied switch may be used to shut down unitoperation. This switch is a binary input wired to theRTM. When opened, the unit shuts down immediatelyand can be canceled by closing the switch. Refer to theunit wiring diagrams (attached to the unit controlpanel) for proper connection terminals. The switchmust be rated for 12 mA @ 24 Vdc minimum. Thisinput will override all VOM inputs, if the VOM option ison the unit.

Occupied/Unoccupied ContactsTo provide night setback control if a remote panel withnight setback was not ordered, install a field-suppliedcontact. This binary input provides the building’soccupied/unoccupied status to the RTM. It can beinitiated by a time clock, or a building automationsystem control output. The relay’s contacts must berated for 12 mA @ 24 Vdc minimum. Refer to theappropriate wiring diagrams (attached to the unitcontrol panel for the proper connection terminals in theunit control panel.

Emergency Stop InputA binary input is provided on the RTM board forinstallation of a field-supplied normally closed (N.C.)switch to use during emergency situations to shutdown all unit operations. When open, an immediateshutdown occurs. An emergency stop diagnosticenters the human interface and the unit will require amanual reset. Refer to the unit wiring diagrams(attached to the unit control panel for the properconnection terminals. The switch must be rated for 12mA @ 24 Vdc minimum. This input will override allVOM inputs, if the VOM option is on the unit.

VAV Box OptionTo interlock VAV box operation with evaporator fanand heat/cool modes, wire the VAV boxes/air valves toVAV box control connections on the terminal block.

Supply Duct Static Pressure ControlThe RTM relies on input from the duct pressuretransducer when a unit is equipped with VFD to set thesupply fan speed to maintain the supply duct staticpressure to within the static pressure setpoint deadband.

RTM SensorsRTM sensors include: zone sensors with or withoutsetpoint inputs and modes, supply air sensor, ductstatic pressure, outside air temperature, outside airhumidity, airflow proving, and dirty filter.

Table 39. RTM sensor resistance vs. temperature

Temp °F ResistanceV ohms

Temp °F ResistanceV ohms

-40 346.1 71 11.60

-30 241.7 72 11.31

-20 170.1 73 11.03

-10 121.4 74 10.76

-5 103.0 75 10.50

0 87.56 76 10.25

5 74.65 77 10.00

10 63.8 78 9.76

15 54.66 79 6.53

20 46.94 80 9.30

25 40.40 85 8.25

30 34.85 90 7.33

35 30.18 100 5.82

40 26.22 105 5.21

45 22.85 110 4.66

50 19.96 120 3.76

55 17.47 130 3.05

60 15.33 140 2.50

65 13.49 150 2.05

66 13.15 160 1.69

67 12.82 170 1.40

68 12.50 180 1.17

69 12.19 190 0.985

70 11.89 200 0.830

Table 40. RTM setpoint analog inputs

Cooling or HeatingSetpoint Input, °F (using

RTM as zone temp.source) ohms

Cooling Setpoint Input, °F(using RTM as supply air

temp. source)resistance, V

40 40 1084

45 45 992

50 50 899

55 55 796

60 60 695

65 65 597

70 70 500

75 75 403

80 80 305

NA 85 208

NA 90 111

CCoonnttrroollss

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 71

Table 41. RTM resistance value vs. system operatingmode

Resistance appliedto RTMmode inputterminals, ohms

CV Units VAVUnits

Fanmode

Systemmode

Systemmode

2320 auto off off

4870 auto cool

7680 auto auto auto

10,770 on off

13,320 on cool

16,130 on auto

19,480 auto heat

27,930 on heat

Note: Mode boundaries are 1000 to 40,000 ohms. Otherboundaries are equal to the midpoint between thenominal mode resistance.

Compressor Module(MCM - Standard on all units)

The Compressor module, upon receiving a request formechanical cooling, energizes the appropriatecompressors and condenser fans. It monitors thecompressor operation through feedback information itreceives from various protection devices.

Human Interface Module—Standard onall UnitsThe human interface (HI) module enables the operatorto adjust the operating parameters for the unit using its16-key keypad on the human interface panel. The HIpanel provides a two line, 40 character, clear language(English, Spanish, or French) LCD screen with unitstatus information and menus to set or modifyoperating parameters. It is mounted in the unit’s maincontrol panel and accessible through the unit’s controlpanel door.

Remote Human Interface Module OptionThe optional remote-mount human interface (RHI)panel has all the functions of the unit-mounted versionexcept for service mode. To use a RHI, the unit must beequipped with an optional interprocessorcommunications bridge (IPCB). Model number digit 32(=2) indicates if the ICPB was ordered with the unit. Ifnot, contact your local Trane representative to order anICPB kit for field installation. The RHI can be located upto 1,000 feet (304.8 m) from the unit. A single RHI canmonitor and control up to four self-contained units ifeach one contains an IPCB. The IPCB switches must beset as SW1–off, SW2–off, and SW3–on.

Interprocessor Communications Board(IPCB - Optional used with the Optional Remote HumanInterface)

The Interprocessor Communication Board expandscommunications from the rooftop unit UCM network toa Remote Human Interface Panel. DIP switch settingson the IPCB module for this application should be;Switches 1 and 2 “Off”, Switch 3 “On”.

Waterside Module—Standard on AllWater-cooled UnitsThe waterside module (WSM) controls all water valvesbased on unit configuration. In addition, the WSMmonitors waterflow proving and the followingtemperatures:

• Entering water

• Entering air low

• Mixed air

• Entering condenser water

• Refrigerant circuit 3:

– Saturated condenser

– Evaporator frost

• Refrigerant circuit 4:

– Condenser

– Evaporator

Cooling Tower InterlockTo interlock condenser pump/tower with coolingoperation, wire the cooling tower to an external 115volt control power source, to ground, and to controlterminal block. Normally open/closed contacts areprovided.

Heat ModuleThe heat module is standard on all units with factory-installed heat. It controls the unit heater to stage upand down to bring the temperature in the controlledspace to within the applicable heating setpoint. Also, itincludes a freezestat, morning warm-up, and heatingoutputs.

Ventilation Override Module (VOM)OptionThe ventilation override module can be field-configured with up to five different override sequencesfor ventilation override control purpose. When any oneof the module’s five binary inputs are activated, it willinitiate specified functions such as: spacepressurization, exhaust, purge, purge with ductpressure control, and unit off.

Once the ventilation sequences are configured, theycan be changed unless they are locked using the HI.

CCoonnttrroollss

72 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Once locked, the ventilation sequences cannot beunlocked.

The compressors and condenser fans disable duringthe ventilation operation. If more than one ventilationsequence activates, the one with the highest priority(VOM “A”) begins first, with VOM “E” having lowestpriority and beginning last.

A description of the VOM binary inputs follows below.

UNIT OFF Sequence “A”When complete system shut down is required, thefollowing sequence can be used.

• Supply fan—off

• Supply fan VFD—off (0 Hz)

• Outside air dampers—closed

• Heat—all stages—off, modulating heat output at 0Vdc

• Occupied/Unoccupied output—de-energized

• VO relay—energized

• Exhaust fan (field provided -installed)—off

• Exhaust damper (field provided -installed)—closed

PRESSURIZE Sequence “B”This override sequence can be used if a positivelypressured space is desired instead of a negativelypressurized space.

• Supply fan—on

• Supply fan VFD—on (60 Hz)/VAV boxes— open

• Outside air dampers—open

• Heat—all stages—off, hydronic heat output at 0 Vdc

• Occupied/ unoccupied output—energized


• Exhaust fan (field provided -installed)—off

• Exhaust damper (field provided -installed)—closed

EXHAUST Sequence “C”With the building’s exhaust fans running and the unit’ssupply fan off, the conditioned space becomesnegatively pressurized. This is desirable for clearing thearea of smoke when necessary; i.e. from anextinguished fire, to keep smoke out of areas that werenot damaged.

• Supply fan—off

• Supply fan VFD—off (0 Hz)

• Outside air dampers—closed


• Occupied/Unoccupied output—de-energized


• Exhaust fan (field provided -installed)—on

• Exhaust damper (field provided -installed)—open

PURGE Sequence “D”This sequence can purge the air out of a buildingbefore coming out of unoccupied mode of operation ina VAV system. Also, it can be used to purge smoke orstale air.

• Supply fan—on

• Supply fan VFD—on (60 hz)/VAV boxes—open

• Outside air damper—open

• Heat—all stages—off, modulating heat output at 0Vdc

• Occupied/Unoccupied output—energized




PURGE with Duct Pressure Control “E”This sequence can be used when supply air control isrequired for smoke control.

• Supply fan—on

• Supply fan VFD—on (if equipped)

• Outside air dampers—open


• Occupied/unoccupied output—energized




NNoottee:: Each system (cooling, supply air, etc.) within theunit can be redefined in the field for each of thefive sequences, if required. Also the definitionsof any or all of the five sequences can be lockedinto the software by simple key strokes at thehuman interface panel. Once locked into thesoftware, the sequences cannot be changed.

Trane Communications Modules

Lontalk®/BACnet® CommunicationInterface Module(LCI/BCI - Optional - used on units with Trane ICS™ or3rd party Building Automation Systems)

The LonTalk/BACnet Communication Interfacemodules expand communications from the unit UCMnetwork to a Trane Tracer Summit™ or a 3rd partybuilding automation system and allow externalsetpoint and configuration adjustment and monitoringof status and diagnostics.

The LCI-I (Lontalk) utilizes an FTT-10A Free Topologytransceiver, which supports non-polarity sensitive, freetopology wiring, which allows the system installer toutilize star, bus, and loop architectures. This controllerworks in standalone mode, peer-to-peer with one ormore other units, or when connected to a Trane Tracer

CCoonnttrroollss

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 73

Summit or a third party building automation systemthat supports LonTalk.

The BCI-I (BACnet) utilizes the BACnet defined MS/TPprotocol as defined in ASHRAE standard 135-2004. Thiscontroller works in standalone mode, with Tracer SC®or when connected to a third party building automationsystem that supports BACnet.

Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy Module(ECEM - Optional used on units with Statitrac and/orcomparative enthalpy options)

The Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy module receivesinformation from the return air humidity sensor, theoutside air humidity sensor, and the return airtemperature sensor to utilize the lowest possiblehumidity level when considering economizeroperation. In addition, it receives space pressureinformation which is used to maintain the spacepressure to within the setpoint control band. Refer toFigure 36, p. 73 for humidity vs. voltage values.

Figure 36. Relative humidity vs. voltage

Figure 37. Velocity pressure transducer/solenoidassembly

Tube from low side of Transducer

PressureTransducer

VentilationControl Module

SolenoidTube from high sideof Transducer

Tube from low sideof Velocity Ring

Ventilation Control Module (VCM)((AAvvaaiillaabbllee oonnllyy wwiitthh TTrraaqq™™ ddaammppeerr ooppttiioonn))

The ventilation control module (VCM) is located in theairside economizer section of the unit and linked to theunit’s UCM network. Using a velocity pressuretransducer/solenoid (pressure sensing ring) in the freshair section allows the VCM to monitor and control freshair entering the unit to a minimum airflow setpoint. See

Figure 36, p. 73 for a detail view of the velocitypressure transducer/solenoid assembly.

An optional temperature sensor can be connected tothe VCM to enable control of a field installed fresh airpreheater.

Also, a field-provided CO2 sensor can be connected tothe VCM to control CO2 reset. The reset functionadjusts the minimum cfm upward as the CO2concentrations increase. The maximum effective (reset)setpoint value for fresh air entering the unit is limitedto the system’s operating cfm. Table 42, p. 73 lists theminimum outside air cfm vs input voltage.

Table 42. Minimum outside air setpoint w/VCMmodule and Traq™ sensing

Unit Input Volts CFM

SXWF 20 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 6,325-8,500

SXWF 22 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 6,325-9,350

SXWF 25 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 6,500-10,625

SXWF 29 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 8,700-12,325

SXWF 32 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 8,700-13,600

SXWF 35 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 9,100-14,875

SXWF 38 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 9,880-16,150

SXWF 42 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 11,200-17,859

SXWF 46 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 11,960-19,550

SXWF 52 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 14,250-22,100

SXWF 58 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 15,080-24,650

SXWF 65 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 16,900-27,625

SXWF 72 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 18,700-29,800

SXWF 80 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 20,800-29,800

SXRF 25 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 8,700-12,325

SXRF 29 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 8,700-13,600

SXRF 30 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 9,100-14,875

SXRF 35 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 9,880-16,150

SXRF 40 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 11,960-19,550

SXRF 50 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 15,080-24,650

SXRF 60 0.5 - 4.5 vdc 20,800-29,800

Generic Building Automation SystemModule OptionGeneric building automation system module (GBAS)provides broad control capabilities for buildingautomation systems other than Trane’s Tracer®system. A field provided potentiometer or a 0-5 Vdcsignal can be applied to any inputs of GBAS to providefollowing points:

CCoonnttrroollss

74 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

GBAS Analog InputsFour analog inputs that can be configured to be any ofthe following:

• Occupied zone cooling

• Unoccupied zone cooling

• Occupied zone heating

• Unoccupied zone heating

• SA cooling setpoint

• SA heating setpoint

• Space static pressure setpoint

• SA static pressure setpoint

GBAS Binary OutputsFive binary outputs to provide diagnostics, signaling upto five alarms. Each of the five relay outputs can bemapped to any/all of the available diagnostics. Eachoutput contains a dry N.O. and N.C. contact with a VArating of 2 amps at 24 Vac.

GBAS Binary InputOne binary input for the self-contained unit to use thedemand limit function. This function is operational onunits with a GBAS and is used to reduce electricalconsumption at peak load times. Demand limiting canbe set at either 50% or 100%. When demand limiting isneeded, mechanical cooling and heating (with field-provided 2-stage electric heat only) operation are eitherpartially (50%), or completely disabled (100%) to saveenergy. The demand limit definition is user definable atthe HI panel. Demand limit binary input accepts a fieldsupplied switch or contact closure. When the need fordemand limiting has been discontinued, the unit’scooling/heating functions will again become fullyenabled.

GBAS Communication (Analog Inputs)The GBAS accepts external setpoints in the form ofanalog inputs for cooling, heating, supply air pressure.Refer to the unit wiring diagram for GBAS input wiringand the various desired setpoints with thecorresponding DC voltage inputs.

Any of the setpoint or output control parameters can beassigned to each of the four analog inputs on the GBASmodule. Also, any combination of the setpoint and/oroutput control parameters can be assigned to theanalog inputs through the HI. To assign the setpoints,apply an external 0-5 Vdc signal to one of the following:

• Directly to the signal input terminals

• To the 5 Vdc source at the GBAS module with a 3-wire potentiometer.

NNoottee:: There is a regulated 5 Vdc output on the GBASmodule that can be used with a potentiometer asa voltage divider. The recommendedpotentiometer value is 1000-100,000 ohms.

The setpoints are linear between the values shown inTable 43, p. 75. Reference Table 44, p. 75 forcorresponding input voltage setpoints. Following areformulas to calculate input voltage or setpoint. SP =setpoint, IPV = input voltage.

• IIff tthhee sseettppooiinntt rraannggee iiss 5500--9900°°FF::

– IPV = (SP - 50) (0.1) + 0.5

– SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/0.1] + 50


– IPV = (SP - 40)(0.8) + 0.5

– SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/0.08] + 40


– IPV = (SP - 40)(0.029) + 0.5

– SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/0.029] + 40

• IIff tthhee ssttaattiicc pprreessssuurree rraannggee iiss 00..0033--00..33 iiwwcc::

– IPV = (SP - 0.03)(14.8) + 0.5

– SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/14.8] + 0.03

• IIff tthhee ssttaattiicc pprreessssuurree rraannggee iiss 00..00--55..00 iiwwcc::

– IPV = (SP)(0.8) + 0.5

– SP = [IPV/(0.8 + 0.5)]

GBAS Demand Limit Relay (Binary Input)The GBAS allows the unit to utilize the demand limitfunction by using a normally open (N.O.) switch to limitthe electrical power usage during peak periods.Demand limit can initiate by a toggle switch closure, atime clock, or an ICS control output. These contactsmust be rated for 12 ma @ 24 Vdc minimum.

When the GBAS module receives a binary input signalindicating demand limiting is required, a commandinitiates to either partially (50%) or fully (100%) inhibitcompressor and heater operation. This can be set at theHI using the setup menu, under the “demand limitdefinition cooling” and “demand limit definitionheating” screens. A toggle switch, time clock, orbuilding automation system control output can initiatedemand limiting.

If the cooling demand limit is set to 50%, half of thecooling capacity will disable when the demand limitbinary input closes. The heating demand limitdefinition can only be set at 100%, unless the unit hasfield-provided two-stage electric heat. In that case, ifthe heating demand limit is set to 50%, half or onestage of heating disables when the demand limit binaryinput closes. If the demand limit definition is set to100%, then all cooling and/or heating will disable whenthe demand limit input closes.

GBAS Diagnostics (Binary Outputs)The GBAS can signal up to five alarm diagnostics,which are fully mappable through the setup menu onthe HI. These diagnostics, along with the alarm outputon the RTM, allow up to six fully mappable alarmoutputs.

CCoonnttrroollss

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 75

Each binary output has a NO and NC contact with arating of two amps at 24 Vac. The five binary outputsare factory preset as shown on the unit wiring diagram(on the unit control panel door). However, theseoutputs can be field defined in a variety ofconfigurations, assigning single or multiple diagnosticsto any output.

For a complete listing of possible diagnostics, see theSelf-Contained Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01. Forterminal strip locations, refer to the unit wiring diagramfor the GBAS.

Table 43. GBAS analog input setpoints

Control Parameter Signal Range Vdc Setpoint Range °F

Occupied zone cooling setpoint (CV units only) 0.5 to 4.5 50 to 90°F

Unoccupied zone cooling setpoint (CV and VAV) 0.5 to 4.5 50 to 90°F

Occupied zone heating setpoint (CV units only) 0.5 to 4.5 50 to 90°F

Unoccupied zone heating setpoint (CV and VAV) 0.5 to 4.5 50 to 90°F

Supply air cooling setpoint (VAV units only) 0.5 to 4.5 40 to 90°F

Supply air hydronic heating setpoint (VAV units only) 0.5 to 4.5 40 to 180 F

Space static pressure setpoint 0.5 to 4.5 0.03 to 0.30 IWC

Supply air pressure setpoint (VAV units only) 0.5 to 4.5 0.0 to 5.0 IWC

Notes:1. Input voltages less than 0.5 Vdc are considered as 0.5 Vdc input signal is lost, the setpoint will "clamp" to the low end of the setpoint scale. No

diagnostic will result from this condition.2. Input voltages greater than 4.5 Vdc are considered to be 4.5 Vdc.3. The actual measured voltage is displayed at the HI.

Table 44. GBAS input voltage corresponding setpoints

Volts Temp. °F Volts Temp. °F Volts Temp. °F Volts Temp. °F

0.5 50 1.6 60 2.6 70 2.7 80

0.6 51 1.7 61 2.7 71 2.8 81

0.7 52 1.8 62 2.8 72 2.9 82

0.8 53 1.9 63 2.9 73 3.0 83

0.9 54 2.0 64 3.0 74 3.1 84

1.0 55 2.1 65 3.1 75 3.2 85

1.1 56 2.2 66 3.2 76 3.3 86

1.2 57 2.3 67 3.3 77 3.4 87

1.3 58 2.4 68 3.4 78 3.5 88

1.5 59 2.5 69 3.5 79 3.6 89

Input Devices and System FunctionsFollowing are basic input device and system functiondescriptions used within the UCM network on self-contained units. Refer to the unit wiring diagrams forspecific connections.

CCoonnttrroollss

76 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Water Purge


During the unoccupied mode, water-cooled units willperiodically circulate water through the condensersand waterside economizer if the user has enabled thepurge function at the HI. The water purge functioncirculates water to introduce fresh water-treatmentchemicals and help prevent water stagnation. Thenumber of hours between each periodic purge, orpurge duration, is user-defined at the HI between 1-999hours. If the periodic purge timer expires while the unitis in occupied mode, it will wait for the next availableunoccupied time before initiating water purge.Contrary, if a request for cooling occurs during a purgesequence, purge will terminate and cooling willcommence.

Compressor Circuit BreakersThe Scroll Compressors are protected by circuitbreakers which interrupt the power supply to thecompressors if the current exceeds the breakers “musttrip” value. During a request for compressor operation,if the Compressor Module detects a problem outsidenormal parameters, it turns any operating compressor(s) on that circuit “Off”, locks out all compressoroperation for that circuit, and initiates a manual resetdiagnostic.

Low Pressure ControlLow pressure (LP) control is accomplished using abinary input device mounted on the suction line, nearthe compressor. If suction pressure drops to 49 (water-cooled), 36 (air-cooled) ± 6 psig, or below, the switchopens.

If the switch is open at start, no compressors on thatcircuit will operate. They are locked out and a manualreset diagnostic initiates. If the LP switch opens after acompressor start, all compressors on that circuit willstop and remain off a minimum 3 minutes beforerestarting. If the LP cutout trips four times in the firstthree minutes of operation, all compressors on thatcircuit lockout and a manual reset diagnostic initiates.

LP switches close at 74 (water-cooled) and 61 (air-cooled)± 6 psig.

Evaporator Temperature Sensor FrostatThe evaporator temperature sensor is an analog inputdevice used to monitor refrigerant temperature insidethe evaporator coil to prevent coil freezing. It isattached to the suction line near the evaporator coilwith circuits 1 and 2 connected to the SCM/MCM andcircuits 3 and 4 connected to the WSM. The coil frostcutout temperature is factory set at 30°F. It is adjustableat the HI from 25-35°F. The compressors stage off asnecessary to prevent icing. After the last compressorstages off, the compressors will restart when theevaporator temperature rises 10°F above the coil frostcutout temperature and the minimum three minute“off” time elapses.

Saturated Condenser Temperature SensorsThe saturated condenser temperature sensors areanalog input devices. They are mounted inside atemperature well located on a condenser tube bend onair-cooled units, and in the condenser shell on water-cooled units. The sensors monitor the saturatedrefrigerant temperature inside the condenser coil andare connected to the SCM/MCM for circuits 1 and 2 (airor water cooled), and WSM for circuits 3 and 4 (onlywater-cooled).

Head Pressure ControlHead pressure control is accomplished using twosaturated refrigerant temperature sensors on air-cooled units and up to four sensors on water-cooledunits.

AAiirr--ccoooolleedd uunniittss:: During a request for compressoroperation when the condensing temperature risesabove the lower limit of the control band, thecompressor module (SCM/MCM) sequences condenserfans on. If the operating fans cannot bring thecondensing temperature to within the control band,more fans turn on. As the saturated condensingtemperature approaches the lower limit of the controlband, fans sequence off. The minimum on/off time forcondenser fan staging is 5.2 seconds. If the system isoperating at a given fan stage below 100% for 30minutes the saturated condensing temperature isabove the efficiency check point setting, a fan stage willbe added. If the saturated condensing temperature fallsbelow the efficiency check point setting, fan controlremains at the present operating stage. If the fan stagecycles four times within a 10 minute period, the lowerlimit temperature is redefined as being equal to thelower limit minus the temporary low limit suppressionsetting. The unit will utilize this new low limittemperature for one hour to reduce condenser fanshort cycling.

WWaatteerr--ccoooolleedd:: Units without WSE, the condenservalve modulates to maintain an average saturatedcondenser temperature. Units with WSE, ifeconomizing and mechanical cooling is necessary theeconomize valve will sacrifice free cooling andmodulate to maintain condensing saturated

CCoonnttrroollss

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 77

temperature. If not economizing, the condenser valvewill modulate to maintain condensing saturatedtemperature. Water-cooled units without head pressurecontrol will lock out mechanical cooling at enteringcondenser water temperatures below 54°F. Mechanicalcooling will resume when the entering condenserwater temperature exceeds 58°F.

Low Ambient Control (Air-Cooled UnitsOnly)The low ambient modulating output on the compressormodule is functional on all units with or without thelow ambient option. When the compressor modulestages up to it's highest stages 2 or 3 depending onunit size), the modulating output is 100% (10 Vdc).When the control is at stage 1, the modulating output(0-10 Vdc) controls the saturated condensingtemperature to within the programmable condensingtemperature low ambient control point.

Low Ambient Compressor LockoutUtilizes an analog input device. When the system isconfigured for low ambient compressor lockout, thecompressors are not allowed to operate if thetemperature of the outside air falls below the lockoutsetpoint. When the temperature rises 5°F above thelockout setpoint, the compressors are allowed tooperate. The factory preset is 50°F.

Return Air Temperature SensorThe return air temperature sensor is an analog inputdevice used with a return humidity sensor on units withthe comparative enthalpy option. The sensor monitorsthe return air temperature and compares it to theoutdoor temperature to establish which temperature isbest suited to maintain cooling requirements. It ismounted in the return air path and connected to theECEM.

Supply Fan Circuit Breaker, Fuses, andOverloadsThe supply fan motor is protected by either circuitbreakers fuses or a combination of fuses andoverloads, dependent upon unit configuration. Circuitbreakers are used on units without a VFD. They will tripand interrupt the motor power supply if the currentexceeds the breaker trip value. The RTM shuts allsystem functions off when detecting an open fanproving switch. Units with a VFD have fuses to protectthe VFD and motor. Units with a VFD w/bypass havefuses to protect VFD circuit and overloads to protect themotor when in bypass.

Supply Air Temperature Low LimitUses the supply air temperature sensor input tomodulate the economizer damper to minimum positionin the event the supply air temperature falls below theoccupied heating setpoint temperature.

Supply Air Temperature SensorThe supply air temperature sensor is an analog inputdevice. It monitors the supply air temperature forsupply air temperature control, supply air temperaturereset, supply air temperature low limiting, and supplyair tempering. It is mounted in the supply air dischargesection of the unit and connected to the RTM.

Supply Airflow Proving SwitchesThis is binary input device used on units to signal theRTM when the supply fan is operating. It is mounted inthe supply fan section and is connected to the RTM.During a request for fan operation and if the differentialswitch opens for 40 consecutive seconds, compressoroperation turns off, heat operation turns off, therequest for supply fan operation turns off and locks out,economizer damper option closes, and a manual resetdiagnostic initiates.

Low Entering Air Protection Device(LEATPD)The low entering air protection device (LEATPD) is abinary input on units with hydronic heat or a watersideeconomizer. It is optional on water-cooled units.

If the LEATPD is on a unit with factory-installed heat, itis mounted in the heat section and connected to theheat module. If the entering air temperature to theheating coil falls to 40°F, the normally open contacts onthe LEATPD close and cause the following events:

• The hydronic heat actuator fully opens.

• The supply fan turns off

• The outside air damper closes

• The SERVICE light at the remote zone sensor optionturns on.

• A LEATPD diagnostic displays at the humaninterface panel.

If the LEATPD is on a water-cooled unit without factory-installed heat, it is wired to the WSM. It will trip if theentering water temperature falls to 34°F, open theeconomizer valve, and energize the pump output.

High Duct Temp Thermostat Option OnUnits with a TCIThe high duct temperature thermostats are binaryinput devices used on units with a Tranecommunication interface module (TCI).They provide ahigh limit unit shutdown and require a manual reset.The thermostats are factory set to open if the supply airtemperature reaches 240°F, or the return airtemperature reaches 135°F. Once tripped, thethermostat requires a manual reset. Reset by pressingthe sensor’s reset button when the air temperaturedecreases approximately 25°F below the cutout point.

Filter SwitchA binary input device that measures the pressuredifferential across the unit filters. It is mounted in the

CCoonnttrroollss

78 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

filter section and is connected to the RTM. A diagnosticSERVICE signal is sent to the remote panel if thepressure differential across the filters is at least 0.5" w.c. The contacts will automatically open when thepressure differential across the filters decrease to 0.4"w.c. The switch differential can be field adjustedbetween 0.17" w.c. to 5.0" w.c. ± 0.05" w.c.

High Duct Static Switch OptionThe high duct static switch is field-mounted in theductwork or plenums with smoke dampers. It willcause a manual reset diagnostic if the duct staticexceeds the pre-set static limit. The static limit isadjustable at the HI.

CCoonnttrroollss

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 79

Pre-StartupBefore starting up units, perform the followingprocedure to ensure proper unit operation.

Units with VFDThis panel is hinged to allow service access to fanmotor and belt drive components that are locatedbehind it.

NNoottee:: The panel weight rating is 225 lbs. total includingfactory-installed components.


WWAARRNNIINNGGHHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmootteeddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd wwaaiitt ffoorr DDCC ccaappaacciittoorrss ttooddiisscchhaarrggee bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. RReeffeerr ttoo tthheemmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss rreeccoommmmeennddaattiioonnss ffoorr pprrooppeerrddiisscchhaarrggee ttiimmee aass DDCC bbuuss ccaappaacciittoorrss rreettaaiinnhhaazzaarrddoouuss vvoollttaaggeess aafftteerr iinnppuutt ppoowweerr hhaass bbeeeennddiissccoonnnneecctteedd.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt// ttaaggoouuttpprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbeeiinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVVvvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrsshhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd bbeeffoorree ttoouucchhiinngg aannyy iinntteerrnnaallccoommppoonneennttss..FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffeeddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

1. Remove the unit center cover panel to the left of theVFD panel.

2. Verify/remove/discard the sheet metal shippingscrews along the top and bottom edges of the VFDpanel.

3. Disconnect the communications cable from thekeypad on the VFD door panel.

4. Turn the two slotted-head fasteners on the rightedge of the VFD panel fully counterclockwise.

5. Pull on the handle to swing the panel 180°.

NNoottee:: To secure the panel in the open position duringservice procedures, attach the chain mounted tothe cabinet frame behind the unit center coverpanel to the chain retainer notch on the edge ofthe VFD panel.

To close and reattach the panel, reverse the aboveprocedures.

NNoottee:: Verify that all wires are in proper position andnot rubbing once the panel has been secured.

Pre-Startup ChecklistComplete this checklist after installing unit to verify allrecommended installation procedures are completebefore startup. This does not replace the detailedinstructions in the appropriate sections of this manual.Always read the entire section carefully to becomefamiliar with the procedures.

Supply Fan• Verify the fan and motor shafts are parallel.

• Verify the fan and motor sheaves are aligned.

• Check the fan belt condition and tension. Adjust thetension if belts are floppy or squeal continually.Replace worn or fraying belts in matched sets.

• Ensure the fan rotates freely.

• Tighten locking screws, bearing set screws andsheaves.

• Ensure bearing locking collars do not wobble whenrotated.

• Remove fan assembly tie down bolts.

• Ensure fan rotation is in direction of arrow on fanhousing. If incorrect, verify incoming powerphasing is correct. Switch wires on the fan contactto properly phase fan if necessary.

Ductwork• Ensure trunk ductwork to VAV boxes is complete

and secure to prevent leaks.

• Verify that all ductwork conforms to NFPA 90A or90B and all applicable local codes

Water-Cooled Unit Piping• Verify condensate drain, water piping drain plugs,

economizer header, and condenser vent plug areinstalled.

Air-Cooled Units Only• Verify leak test was performed after refrigerant

piping was installed.

80 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

• Verify liquid line filter driers installed.

Units with Hydronic Heat• Verify the entering water temperature sensor is

installed upstream of the hydronic coil.

Units with Electric Heat• Verify that a zone temp sensor is installed.

Electrical• Verify electrical connections are tight.

Components• Verify liquid line service valve, and suction and

discharge service valves if present, are open atstartup.

NNoottee:: Each compressor suction line contains a lowpressure sensor that will shut thecompressor down in low pressure situations.See Table 35, p. 62.

• Ensure system components are properly set andinstalled.

PPrree--SSttaarrttuupp

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 81

StartupWWAARRNNIINNGG

LLiivvee EElleeccttrriiccaall CCoommppoonneennttss!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww aallll eelleeccttrriiccaall ssaaffeettyy pprreeccaauuttiioonnsswwhheenn eexxppoosseedd ttoo lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss ccoouullddrreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..WWhheenn iitt iiss nneecceessssaarryy ttoo wwoorrkk wwiitthh lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaallccoommppoonneennttss,, hhaavvee aa qquuaalliiffiieedd lliicceennsseedd eelleeccttrriicciiaannoorr ootthheerr iinnddiivviidduuaall wwhhoo hhaass bbeeeenn pprrooppeerrllyy ttrraaiinneeddiinn hhaannddlliinngg lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss ppeerrffoorrmmtthheessee ttaasskkss..

NNOOTTIICCEECCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww wwiillll ccaauussee tthheeccoommpprreessssoorr ttoo ooppeerraattee iinn aa vvaaccuuuumm aanndd rreessuulltt iinnccoommpprreessssoorr ddaammaaggee..NNeevveerr mmaannuuaallllyy oorr aauuttoommaattiiccaallllyy ppuummpp ddoowwnnssyysstteemm bbeellooww 77 ppssiigg..

NNOOTTIICCEECCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnccoommpprreessssoorr ddaammaaggee..KKeeeepp ccrraannkkccaassee hheeaatteerrss oonn wwhheenneevveerr rreeffrriiggeerraanntt iissiinn tthhee ssyysstteemm..IIff ccrraannkkccaassee hheeaatteerrss hhaavvee nnoott bbeeeenn oonn wwiitthhrreeffrriiggeerraanntt iinn tthhee ssyysstteemm,, ttuurrnn tthhee ccrraannkkccaasseehheeaatteerrss oonn ffoorr aa mmiinniimmuumm ooff 2244 hhoouurrss bbeeffoorreessttaarrttiinngg ccoommpprreessssoorrss..

To start the unit, complete the following steps in order.

Review “Preliminary Refrigerant Charging,” p. 41, ifapplicable. Confirm all steps were completed.

Air-Cooled Only• Charging is more accurate at higher outdoor

temperatures. If outdoor temperature is < 80°F,temporarily disable fan pressure control switches.See unit wiring diagrams and disconnect the wiresbetween switches and terminal strip.

• Do not attempt to charge system with low ambientdampers operating (if applicable). Disable thesedampers in “Open” position before proceeding.

• Evaporator load should be at least 70°F return air,350 CFM/ton.

• Work on only one circuit at a time. See section“General Data,” p. 14 for compressor sequencing.

NNoottee:: R-410A compressors have belly band crankcaseheaters that must be energized 24 hours beforestarting compressor. Power to the unit willenergize the heaters. Heaters will be energizedduring the off-cycle as long as the unit has power.Failure to perform these pre-start instructionscould result in compressor damage.

1. Verify compressor crank case heaters have been onfor at least 24 hours.

2. Make sure all service valves are open.

3. Attach a thermocouple type temperature sensor onliquid line close to liquid line service valve. Toensure an accurate reading, clean line where sensoris attached. After securing sensor to line, insulatesensor and line to isolate it from ambient air.

4. Attach service gauges to suction and dischargeports.

5. Check low side pressure. Low pressure cutoutopens below, and closes above, values in Table 35,p. 62. If the low side pressure is less than the openpsig, refrigerant may need to be added to thesuction line before starting the compressor(s) toclose the switch. SLOWLY meter into the suctionline only as much R- 410A as needed to close thelow pressure cutout. Use the VAPOR chargingconnection. If possible, plan to use this entirerefrigerant bottle on the same unit in order tominimize fractionalization. Use an accurate scale tomeasure and record amount of R-410A added.

6. Switch the field supplied unit disconnect to “OFF”.Open the unit control box and plug in the resetrelay for only the circuit being started

WWAARRNNIINNGGHHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouullddrreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmootteeddiissccoonnnneeccttss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerrlloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerrccaann nnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. VVeerriiffyy tthhaatt nnooppoowweerr iiss pprreesseenntt wwiitthh aa vvoollttmmeetteerr..

7. Turn 115 volt control circuit switch “ON”. Closecontrol box and switch field supplied unitdisconnect “ON”. Unit power should be off nolonger than 60 minutes to prevent refrigerantmigration to compressor sumps. If power is off forlonger than 60 minutes, allow time for crankcaseheaters to drive refrigerant from compressor sumpsbefore starting compressors.

8. Adjust setpoints at the HI.

82 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

NNoottee:: Sufficient cooling load must be visible torefrigerant circuit controls for mechanicalrefrigeration to operate. If necessary,temporarily reduce the discharge air setpointto verify the refrigeration cycle operation.

9. Check voltage at all compressor terminals to ensureit is within 10% of nameplate voltage.

10. Check voltage imbalance from these three voltagereadings at each compressor. Maximum allowablevoltage imbalance, phase to phase is 2%.

11. Start the first step compressor only.

12. Check amp draw at compressor terminals. RLA andLRA are on the unit nameplate.

13. Measure amp draw at evaporator fan motorterminals. FLA data is on the motor nameplate.

14. As soon as a compressor starts, verify correctrotation. If a scroll compressor is allowed to runbackwards for even a very short period of time,internal compressor damage could occur andcompressor life could be reduced. When rotatingbackwards scroll compressors make a loud noise,do not pump, and draw about 1/2 expected amps,and low side shell gets hot. Immediately shut off acompressor rotating backwards and correct wiring.

NNOOTTIICCEECCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnccoommpprreessssoorr ddaammaaggee..IImmpprrooppeerr ppoowweerr pphhaassiinngg wwiillll ccaauussee ccoommpprreessssoorr ttoorruunn bbaacckkwwaarrddss.. CCoommpprreessssoorr ccoouulldd bbee rruunnnniinnggbbaacckkwwaarrddss iiff iitt iiss nnooiissyy,, llooww ssiiddee sshheellll ggeettss hhoott,,ssuuccttiioonn pprreessssuurree ddooeess nnoott ddrroopp wwiitthhiinn 55 sseeccoonnddssaafftteerr ssttaarrttuupp,, aanndd ccoommpprreessssoorr oonnllyy ddrraawwss ½½eexxppeecctteedd aammppss.. SSttoopp tthhee ccoommpprreessssoorr iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyyaanndd hhaavvee aa qquuaalliiffiieedd eelleeccttrriicciiaann oorr tteecchhnniicciiaannpprrooppeerrllyy ttrraaiinneedd iinn 33 pphhaassee ppoowweerr ccoorrrreecctt tthheewwiirriinngg..

15. AAiirr CCoooolleedd OOnnllyy: Check condenser fans for properrotation. From top of unit, correct rotation directionis clockwise. If running backwards, correct wiring.

WWAARRNNIINNGGRRoottaattiinngg CCoommppoonneennttss!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouullddrreessuulltt iinn rroottaattiinngg ccoommppoonneennttss ccuuttttiinngg aanndd ssllaasshhiinnggtteecchhnniicciiaann wwhhiicchh ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouussiinnjjuurryy..DDuurriinngg iinnssttaallllaattiioonn,, tteessttiinngg,, sseerrvviicciinngg aannddttrroouubblleesshhoooottiinngg ooff tthhiiss pprroodduucctt iitt mmaayy bbeenneecceessssaarryy ttoo wwoorrkk wwiitthh lliivvee aanndd eexxppoosseedd rroottaattiinnggccoommppoonneennttss.. HHaavvee aa qquuaalliiffiieedd oorr lliicceennsseedd sseerrvviicceeiinnddiivviidduuaall wwhhoo hhaass bbeeeenn pprrooppeerrllyy ttrraaiinneedd iinnhhaannddlliinngg eexxppoosseedd rroottaattiinngg ccoommppoonneennttss,, ppeerrffoorrmmtthheessee ttaasskkss..

16. After 10 minutes, start second compressor ofmanifold circuits.

17. Allow 10 minutes for circuit operation to stabilize atfull load.

18. Complete charging, if required.

Final Refrigerant ChargeIf full charge was not used during installation, followthese steps:

1. Determine remaining charge required bysubtracting charge added during “PreliminaryRefrigerant Charging,” p. 41 from the total.

2. With all circuit compressors running, SLOWLYmeter remaining R-410A into the suction line fromthe LIQUID charging connection.

NNOOTTIICCEECCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!OOvveerrcchhaarrggiinngg ssyysstteemm ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ccoommpprreessssoorrffaaiilluurree aanndd//oorr rreedduucceedd ccoommpprreessssoorr lliiffee..DDoo nnoott oovveerrcchhaarrggee ssyysstteemm.. EExxcceessssiivvee rreeffrriiggeerraannttcchhaarrggiinngg ccaann ccaauussee ccoommpprreessssoorr lliiqquuiidd sslluuggggiinngg aattssttaarrttuupp,, aanndd ccoonnddiittiioonnss wwhheerree ccoommpprreessssoorrss aanndd//oorrccoonnddeennsseerr ffaannss sshhoorrtt ccyyccllee..

NNOOTTIICCEECCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnccoommpprreessssoorr ffaaiilluurree aanndd//oorr rreedduucceedd ccoommpprreessssoorrlliiffee..TToo pprreevveenntt ccoommpprreessssoorr lliiqquuiidd sslluuggggiinngg,, oonnllyy aaddddlliiqquuiidd iinn tthhee ssuuccttiioonn lliinnee wwhheenn tthhee ccoommpprreessssoorr iissrruunnnniinngg.. UUssee eexxttrreemmee ccaauuttiioonn ttoo mmeetteerr lliiqquuiiddrreeffrriiggeerraanntt iinnttoo tthhee ssuuccttiioonn lliinnee sslloowwllyy.. IIff lliiqquuiidd iissaaddddeedd ttoooo rraappiiddllyy,, ccoommpprreessssoorr ooiill ddiilluuttiioonn aanndd ooiillppuummppoouutt ccoouulldd ooccccuurr..

3. Use an accurate scale to measure and recordamount of R-410A added.

4. After unit has been operating for approximately 30minutes at full load, measure and record operatingpressures.

AAiirr CCoooolleedd OOnnllyy: Operating pressure measurementmust be made with all condenser fans running.

5. Repeat for other circuits.

6. Confirm, and adjust charge if needed, by checkingsubooling at AHRI 340/360 full load operatingconditions (80/67°F entering evap, ~300CFM/ton, 85/95°F EWT/LWT for water-cooled and 95°F OA forair-cooled).

• Water-cooled subcooling should be 8-10°F

• Air-cooled subcooling should be 14-18°F

SSttaarrttuupp

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 83

Startup ProcedureUsing the startup log on the following pages, establishnominal conditions for consistent measurements asfollows:

• Leaving air greater than 60°F

• Entering air temperature = 70 to 90°F

• Entering water temperature > 60°F

With all compressors running at full load:

1. Compute superheat from the suction line pressureand temperature at the compressor on each circuit.Adjust the thermal expansion valve settings ifnecessary. Superheat should be between 14 and20°F.

2. Inspect refrigerant flow in the liquid line sight glass.Flow should be smooth and even, with no bubblesonce the system has stabilized.

NNoottee:: Sight glass moisture indicator may showcaution or wet at startup. May need up to 12hours of operation for system to reachequilibrium and correctly showmoisture.

Normal startup will occur provided that Tracer™Summit is not controlling the module outputs or thegeneric BAS is not keeping the unit off. To preventTracer Summit from affecting unit operation, removeTracer wiring and make required changes to setpointand sensor sources.

Operating & Programming InstructionsSee Self-Contained Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01*-EN, for available unit operating setpoints andinstructions. A copy ships with each unit. For units withVFD option, see installer guide that ships with eachVFD.

Startup Log

Unit:

Unit Location:

Unit Voltage

Evaporator

Evaporator fanmotor horsepower:

Evaporator fanmotor amps:

Evaporator fan rpm (actual):

Evaporator system static (from test andbalance report or actual readings)

Supply duct static: Return duct static:

Evaporator system cfm (test and balancesheet or actual tested):

Evaporator Air Conditioners (with all compressor operating)

Entering Leaving

Dry-bulb °F: Dry-bulb °F:

Wet-bulb °F: Wet-bulb °F:

Circuit Compressor Amp Draw Suctionpressure,psig

Dischargepressure,psig

Superheat Liquid linepressure,psig

Sub cooling°F

A B(a)

Circuit A

Circuit B

Circuit C

Circuit D

Circuit E

Circuit F

(a) Air-Cooled only

SSttaarrttuupp

84 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Water-Cooled Units

Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C Circuit D Circuit E Circuit F

Entering watertemp °F

Leaving watertemp °F

Entering waterpressure psig

Leaving waterpressure psig

Air-Cooled Units (Data taken from outside condensing unit)

Voltage

Amp Draw

Entering air temp °F (Outside condensingunit only)

Leaving air temp °F (Outside condensingunit only)

Refrigerant pressures at condenser, psig

Sub cooling at condenser °F

SSttaarrttuupp

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 85

MaintenanceService AccessAccess unit controls through the front, top left panel.The panel is secured with two quick- acting fastenersand an automatic latch, which require a screwdriver toremove.

Removable unit panels on the right-hand side provideaccess to compressors, fan, motor belts, extendedgrease line fittings, and drive side bearing. On theunit’s left side, removable panels allow access to theexpansion valves, filter driers, refrigerant sight glasses,liquid line valves, opposite drive fan bearing, extendedgrease line fittings, condensers, and watersideeconomizer control valve.

The compressor, condenser, and fan motor accesspanels are secured with quick acting fasteners. Fastthread screws secure access panels for economizercoils, evaporator coils expansion valves, water valves,and left fan bearing. Access to other componentsrequires removal of semipermanent panels securedwith sheet metal screws. During operation, sightglasses are viewable through the portholes on theunit’s left upper panel.

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)


The VFD access panel is hinged to allow service accessto the fan motor and belt drive components that arelocated behind it. To swing the panel open:

1. Remove the unit center cover panel to the left of theVFD panel.

2. Remove and discard the sheet metal shippingscrews along the top and bottom edges of the VFDpanel.

3. Disconnect the communications cable from thekeypad on the VFD door panel.

4. Turn the two slotted-head fasteners on the rightedge of the VFD panel fully counterclockwise.

5. Pull on the handle to swing the panel 180°.

To close and reattach the panel, reverse the procedureslisted above.

NNootteess::

• To secure the panel in the open positionduring service procedures, attach the chainmounted to the cabinet frame behind theunit center cover panel to the chain retainernotch on the edge of the VFD panel.

• Verify that all wires are in their properposition and not rubbing before replacingthe panel.

• Panel weight rating = 225 lbs. total,including factory-installed components.

Air FiltersWWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggeeccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorrsseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmootteeddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunnccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerrlloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerrccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. FFoorr vvaarriiaabblleeffrreeqquueennccyy ddrriivveess oorr ootthheerr eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinnggccoommppoonneennttss pprroovviiddeedd bbyy TTrraannee oorr ootthheerrss,, rreeffeerr ttootthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss lliitteerraattuurree ffoorraalllloowwaabbllee wwaaiittiinngg ppeerriiooddss ffoorr ddiisscchhaarrggee ooffccaappaacciittoorrss.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerrrraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavveeddiisscchhaarrggeedd..FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffeeddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

Filter access doors are on the unit’s left side. Filteraccess for the 2" filter rack on optional steam and hotwater coils and airside economizers is also on the leftside of the unit. To replace throwaway filters, removethe dirty elements and install new filters with the filter’sdirectional arrows pointing toward the fan. Verify thatno air bypasses the filters. See Figure 38, p. 86 andFigure 39, p. 86 for proper filter placement.

86 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Figure 38. Unit filter sizes and placement for SXWF20 to 38 tons or SXRF 25 to 35 tons

18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20

20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20

18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20

16 x 20 16 x 20 16 x 20 16 x 20

20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20

18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20

Without steam or hot water coil

With steam or hot water coil

NNoottee:: All filters are 2". These views are from the back ofthe unit (L-R).

Figure 39. Unit filter sizes and placement for SXWF 4to 80 tons or SXRF 40 to 60 tonsWithout hot water or steam coil

25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20

20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20

25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20

With hot water or steam coil

25 x 20 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 20

20 x 20 20 x 16 20 x 16 20 x 16 20 x 16 20 x 20

25 x 20 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 20


Figure 40. Unit filter sizes and placement for SXWF90 to 110 tons

24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 12

24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 12

24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 12

Without steam or hot water coil


Inspecting and Cleaning theDrain PanCheck the condensate drain pan and drain line toensure that the condensate drains properly at leastevery six months or as dictated by operatingexperience.

If evidence of standing water or condensate overflowexists, take steps to identify and remedy the causeimmediately. Refer to the troubleshooting section ofthis manual for possible causes and solutions.


Clean drain pans using the following procedure:

1. Disconnect all electrical power to the unit.

2. Don the appropriate personal protective equipment(PPE).

3. Remove all standing water.

4. Use a scraper or other tools to remove and solidmatter. Remove solid matter with a vacuum devicethat utilizes high efficiency particulate arrestance(HEPA) filters with a minimum efficiency of 99.97%at 0.3 micron particle size.

5. Thoroughly clean the contaminated area(s) with a

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 87

mild bleach and water solution or an EPA-approvedsanitizer specifically designed for HVAC use.Carefully follow the sanitizer manufacturer’sinstructions regarding product use.

6. Immediately rinse the drain pan thoroughly withfresh water to prevent potential corrosion from thecleaning solution.

7. Allow the unit to dry thoroughly before putting thesystem back into service.

8. Properly dispose of all contaminated materials andcleaning solution.

Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan


Inspect the fan section every six months or morefrequently if operating experience dictates. Cleanaccumulated dirt and organic matter on the fan interiorsurfaces using the following procedure:


2. Wear the appropriate personal protectiveequipment (PPE).

3. Use a portable vacuum with HEPA filtration toremove the loose dirt and organic matter. The filtershould be 99.97% efficient at 0.3 micron particlesize.

4. Thoroughly clean the fan and associatedcomponents with an industrial cleaning solution.Carefully follow the cleaning solutionmanufacturer’s instructions regarding personalprotection and ventilation when using theirproduct.

5. Rinse the affected surfaces thoroughly with freshwater and a fresh sponge to prevent potentialcorrosion of metal surfaces.

6. Allow the unit to dry completely before putting itback into service.

7. Properly dispose of all contaminated materials andcleaning solution.

Supply FanIImmppoorrttaanntt:: On units ordered with a Design Special of

Inlet Guide Vanes, refer to non-current IOM(SCXF-SVX01D-EN) dated on or beforeMarch 2008 for maintenance procedure.

Fan Drive


Perform the following procedures according to the“Maintenance Periodic Check List”:

1. Rotate the fan wheel to ensure it turns freely in theproper direction and is not rubbing on the fanhousing or inlet. If necessary, center the fan wheelagain.

2. Check the position of both shafts. Fan and motorshafts should operate parallel to each other formaximum belt and bearing life. Shim as necessaryunder the motor or fan bearings to obtain properalignment.

3. Check the fan motor sheave alignment with straightedge or a tightly pulled string. For sheaves ofdifferent widths, place a string in the center grooveof each sheave and pull it tight for a center line. SeeFigure 42, p. 89 for recommended torques.

4. Once the sheaves are properly aligned, tightensheave set screws to proper torque.

5. Check belt tension. Refer to the “Measuring BeltTension” section.

6. If required, adjust belt to the minimumrecommended tension. Refer to “Adjusting BeltTension” section.

7. Re-tighten bearing set screws to the proper torquesafter aligning the sheaves. See for proper torques.


88 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

8. Check the fan bearing locking collars for tightnesson the shaft. To tighten the locking collar, loosenthe set screw and slide the collar into its properposition over the extended end of the inner case.Tighten the set screw to the torque value in .

9. During air balancing, verify the sheave alignment,belt tension, and that the shaft is parallel.

Figure 41. Fan shaft and motor sheave alignment

Fan BearingsThe opposite drive end bearing is a special bearingwith close tolerance fit of balls and races. Replace thisbearing with the same part number as the originalbearing.

NNOOTTIICCEEBBeeaarriinngg FFaaiilluurree!!DDoo nnoott mmiixx ggrreeaasseess wwiitthh ddiiffffeerreenntt bbaasseess wwiitthhiinn tthheebbeeaarriinngg aass iitt ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn pprreemmaattuurree bbeeaarriinnggffaaiilluurree..

Table 45. AO smith bearing lubrication schedule

SpeedServiceOver1800rpm

FrameAll

Stand-ard

Service6

months

SevereService3

months

Extreme3

months

1800 rpm 140-180 3 yrs 1 yr 6 mths

210-280 2 1/2 yrs 10 1/2mths

5 1/2mths

320-360 2 yrs 9 mths 4 1/2mths

400-440 1 1/2 yrs 8 mths 4 mths

Note: Service standard - 8 hrs/day, normal to light loading, 100°Fambient temp. max. Severe service - 24 hrs/day, shockloading, vibration, dirt or dust, 100°F to 150°F ambienttemp. Extreme service - heavy shock or vibration, dirt ordust, 100°F to 150°F ambient temp.

Table 46. Compatible with NLGI grade 2 lithium fanbearing greases

Type

Shell Alvania EP2

Mobile SHC 220

FINA LICAL

Table 47. Compatible with NLGI grade 2 lithium fanbearing greases

Recommended Grease Recommended OperatingRange

FINA LICALShell Alvania EP2Mobile SHC 220

20°F to 205°F

Fan Belt TensionNNoottee:: Check fan belt tension at least twice during the

first days of new belt operation since there is arapid decrease in tension until belts are run-in.

Proper belt tension is necessary to endure maximumbearing and drive component life and is based on fanbrake horsepower requirements. If frayed or worn,replace belts in matched sets.

Measuring Belt TensionMeasure fan belt tension with a Browning, Gates, orequivalent belt tension gauge. Determine deflection bydividing the belt span distance (in inches) by 64. SeeFigure 42, p. 89. Use the following procedure tomeasure belt tension:

1. Measure belt span between centers of sheaves andset the large “O” ring of the tensioning gauge at 1/64 inch for each inch of belt span.

2. Set the load “O” ring at zero.

3. Place the large end of the gauge at the center of thebelt span. Press down until the large “O” ring iseven with the top of the belt line or the next belt asin Figure 42, p. 89. Place a straight edge across thesheaves as a reference point. See Figure 41, p. 88.

4. Remove the gauge. Note that the load “O” ring nowindicates a number on the plunger scale. Thisnumber represents pounds of force required todeflect the belt.

5. Check the reading from step 4 against the valuesgiven in . If necessary, readjust belt tension.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 89

Table 48. Fan hub and sheave torques

Unit size FanDiameter

Set ScrewSize

Torque (ft-lbs)

SCWF 20

18" 5/16" 12SCWF 22

SCWF 25

SCWF 29

18" 5/16" 12SCWF 32

SCRF 25

SCRF 30

SCWF 35

20" 5/16" 14SCWF 38

SCRF 30

SCRF 35

SCWF 42

25 3/8" 24

SCWF 46

SCWF 52

SCWF 58

SCRF 40

SCRF 50

SCWF 65

27 3/8" 24

SCWF 72

SCWF 80

SCRF 60

SCWF 90

SCWF C0

SCWF C1

Adjusting Belt Tension

NNOOTTIICCEEBBeelltt TTeennssiioonn!!DDoo nnoott oovveerr--tteennssiioonn bbeellttss aass iitt ccoouulldd rreedduuccee ffaannaanndd mmoottoorr bbeeaarriinngg lliiffee,, aacccceelleerraattee bbeelltt wweeaarr aannddppoossssiibbllyy ccaauussee sshhaafftt ffaaiilluurree..

Figure 42. Belt tension gauge (top) and fan beltadjustment (bottom)

To adjust belt tension see Figure 42, p. 89 and performthe following procedure:

1. Loosen bolts A, B, and E on both sides of the slidingmotor base. See Figure 43, p. 90.

2. Loosen nuts C and D (as required for motorhorsepower) to slide the motor on its mountingplate in the proper direction to tension or relievetension on the belt.

3. Adjust nuts A-D and bolt E. Do not stretch the beltsover the sheaves.

4. Retighten all nuts and bolts.

5. Verify tension is adjusted properly.

Recommended belt tension range values are on theunit fan scroll. To access the fan scroll, face the right-hand side of the unit and remove the top left panel. Thebelt tension label is on the top right-hand corner of thefan scroll. See Figure 43, p. 90

The correct operation tension for a V-belt drive is thelowest tension at which the belt will not slip under thepeak load conditions. It may be necessary to increasethe tension of some drives to reduce flopping orexcessive startup squealing.


90 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Figure 43. Location of fan belt label on fan scroll (top) and belt tensioning with fan adjustment points (bottom)


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 91

Figure 44. Right-side view of the self-contained unit

Image Tag Expected within Figure TagFigure 45. Fan assembly

CompressorsScroll Compressor Failure Diagnosis andReplacementIf compressor failure is suspected, refer to COM-SVN01A-EN for detailed information regarding

compressor failure diagnosis and replacement of scrollcompressors.

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: If compressor replacement of a manifoldset is required, DO NOT alter manifoldpiping. The design is critical to properrefrigerant flow.

40 Ton Air-Cooled Compressor SuctionRestrictor ReplacementThe 40T air-cooled unit has a manifold compressor seton one circuit. A restrictor in the 10 ton compressorsuction connection balances refrigerant flow.Instructions below are for installation if compressorreplacement is required.

Figure 46. Restrictor installation


92 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Refrigerant SystemIf refrigerant system repair is required, Leak Test,Brazing and Evacuation Procedures are described.

Preliminary charging is described in the Installation–Mechanical section, “Preliminary RefrigerantCharging,” p. 41 and final charging is described in theStartup section, “Final Refrigerant Charge,” p. 82.

Ignore Air Cooled Only steps for Water Cooledsystems.

Refrigerant systems that have been opened must havefilter driers replaced and complete leak test andevacuation before recharging.

Refrigerant Leak Test Procedure

WWAARRNNIINNGGCCoonnffiinneedd SSppaaccee HHaazzaarrddss!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..DDoo nnoott wwoorrkk iinn ccoonnffiinneedd ssppaacceess wwhheerree rreeffrriiggeerraannttoorr ootthheerr hhaazzaarrddoouuss,, ttooxxiicc oorr ffllaammmmaabbllee ggaass mmaayy bbeelleeaakkiinngg.. RReeffrriiggeerraanntt oorr ootthheerr ggaasseess ccoouulldd ddiissppllaacceeaavvaaiillaabbllee ooxxyyggeenn ttoo bbrreeaatthhee,, ccaauussiinngg ppoossssiibblleeaasspphhyyxxiiaattiioonn oorr ootthheerr sseerriioouuss hheeaalltthh rriisskkss.. SSoommeeggaasseess mmaayy bbee ffllaammmmaabbllee aanndd oorr eexxpplloossiivvee.. IIff aa lleeaakkiinn ssuucchh ssppaacceess iiss ddeetteecctteedd,, eevvaaccuuaattee tthhee aarreeaaiimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy aanndd ccoonnttaacctt tthhee pprrooppeerr rreessccuuee oorrrreessppoonnssee aauutthhoorriittyy..

WWAARRNNIINNGGEExxpplloossiioonn HHaazzaarrdd!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww ssaaffee lleeaakk tteesstt pprroocceedduurreess bbeelloowwccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy oorreeqquuiippmmeenntt oorr pprrooppeerrttyy--oonnllyy--ddaammaaggee..NNeevveerr uussee aann ooppeenn ffllaammee ttoo ddeetteecctt ggaass lleeaakkss.. UUssee aalleeaakk tteesstt ssoolluuttiioonn ffoorr lleeaakk tteessttiinngg..

WWAARRNNIINNGGEExxpplloossiioonn HHaazzaarrdd!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww tthheessee iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy oorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt oorr pprrooppeerrttyy--oonnllyy ddaammaaggee..UUssee oonnllyy ddrryy nniittrrooggeenn wwiitthh aa pprreessssuurree rreegguullaattoorr ffoorrpprreessssuurriizziinngg uunniitt.. DDoo nnoott uussee aacceettyylleennee,, ooxxyyggeenn oorrccoommpprreesssseedd aaiirr oorr mmiixxttuurreess ccoonnttaaiinniinngg tthheemm ffoorrpprreessssuurree tteessttiinngg.. DDoo nnoott uussee mmiixxttuurreess ooff aahhyyddrrooggeenn ccoonnttaaiinniinngg rreeffrriiggeerraanntt aanndd aaiirr aabboovveeaattmmoosspphheerriicc pprreessssuurree ffoorr pprreessssuurree tteessttiinngg aass tthheeyymmaayy bbeeccoommee ffllaammmmaabbllee aanndd ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn aanneexxpplloossiioonn.. RReeffrriiggeerraanntt,, wwhheenn uusseedd aass aa ttrraaccee ggaasssshhoouulldd oonnllyy bbee mmiixxeedd wwiitthh ddrryy nniittrrooggeenn ffoorrpprreessssuurriizziinngg uunniittss..

WWAARRNNIINNGGEExxpplloossiioonn HHaazzaarrdd!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonn bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..DDoo nnoott eexxcceeeedd uunniitt nnaammeeppllaattee ddeessiiggnn pprreessssuurreesswwhheenn lleeaakk tteessttiinngg ssyysstteemm..

WWAARRNNIINNGGRR--441100AA RReeffrriiggeerraanntt uunnddeerr HHiigghheerrPPrreessssuurree tthhaann RR--2222!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo uussee pprrooppeerr eeqquuiippmmeenntt oorr ccoommppoonneennttss aassddeessccrriibbeedd bbeellooww,, ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn eeqquuiippmmeenntt ffaaiilliinnggaanndd ppoossssiibbllyy eexxppllooddiinngg,, wwhhiicchh ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh,, sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy,, oorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt ddaammaaggee..TThhee uunniittss ddeessccrriibbeedd iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaall uussee RR--441100AArreeffrriiggeerraanntt wwhhiicchh ooppeerraatteess aatt hhiigghheerr pprreessssuurreesstthhaann RR--2222.. UUssee OONNLLYY RR--441100AA rraatteedd sseerrvviicceeeeqquuiippmmeenntt oorr ccoommppoonneennttss wwiitthh tthheessee uunniittss.. FFoorrssppeecciiffiicc hhaannddlliinngg ccoonncceerrnnss wwiitthh RR--441100AA,, pplleeaasseeccoonnttaacctt yyoouurr llooccaall TTrraannee rreepprreesseennttaattiivvee..

NNoottee:: These service procedures require working withrefrigerant. Do not release refrigerant to theatmosphere! The service technician mustcomply with all federal, state, and local laws.

When leak-testing refrigerant systems, observe allsafety precautions. Leak test only one circuit at a timeto minimize system exposure to potentially harmfulmoisture in the air.

Field Piping (Air-cooled Discharge and LiquidLines)1. Ensure all required field-installed piping pressure

tests are completed in accordance with nationaland/or local codes.

2. Close liquid line angle valve.

3. Connect R-410A refrigerant cylinder to high sidecharging port (at Remote Condenser or field-supplied discharge line access port). Addrefrigerant to reach pressure of 12 to 15 psig.

4. Disconnect refrigerant cylinder. Connect drynitrogen cylinder to high side charging port andincrease pressure to 150 psig. Do not exceed highside (discharge) unit nameplate design pressure.Do not subject low side (suction) components tohigh side pressure.

5. Check all piping joints, valves, etc. for leaks.Recommend using electronic detector capable ofmeasuring 0.1 oz/year leak rate.

6. If a leak is located, use proper procedures toremove the refrigerant/nitrogen mixture, breakconnections and make repairs. Retest for leaks.



SCXF-SVX01R-EN 93

System Repair1. If system is water cooled with service valves, or air

cooled, high and low side may be testedindependently by closing liquid line angle valve andwater cooled unit discharge line ball valve.Otherwise leave all valves open and DO NOTexceed low side design pressure.

2. Connect R-410A refrigerant cylinder to chargingport, add refrigerant to reach pressure of 12 to 15psig.

3. Disconnect refrigerant cylinder. Connect drynitrogen cylinder to high side charging port andincrease pressure to 150 psig. DO NOT exceed unitnameplate design pressures. If testing completesystem, low side design pressure is maximum.

4. Check piping and/or components as appropriate forleaks.

5. Recommend using electronic detector capable ofmeasuring 0.1 oz/year leak rate.

6. If a leak is located, use proper procedures toremove the refrigerant/nitrogen mixture, breakconnections and make repairs. Retest for leaks.


Brazing Procedures

WWAARRNNIINNGGEExxpplloossiioonn HHaazzaarrdd aanndd DDeeaaddllyy GGaasseess!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww aallll pprrooppeerr ssaaffee rreeffrriiggeerraanntthhaannddlliinngg pprraaccttiicceess ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouussiinnjjuurryy..NNeevveerr ssoollddeerr,, bbrraazzee oorr wweelldd oonn rreeffrriiggeerraanntt lliinneess oorraannyy uunniitt ccoommppoonneennttss tthhaatt aarree aabboovvee aattmmoosspphheerriiccpprreessssuurree oorr wwhheerree rreeffrriiggeerraanntt mmaayy bbee pprreesseenntt..AAllwwaayyss rreemmoovvee rreeffrriiggeerraanntt bbyy ffoolllloowwiinngg tthheegguuiiddeelliinneess eessttaabblliisshheedd bbyy tthhee EEPPAA FFeeddeerraall CClleeaannAAiirr AAcctt oorr ootthheerr ssttaattee oorr llooccaall ccooddeess aass aapppprroopprriiaattee..AAfftteerr rreeffrriiggeerraanntt rreemmoovvaall,, uussee ddrryy nniittrrooggeenn ttoobbrriinngg ssyysstteemm bbaacckk ttoo aattmmoosspphheerriicc pprreessssuurree bbeeffoorreeooppeenniinngg ssyysstteemm ffoorr rreeppaaiirrss.. MMiixxttuurreess ooffrreeffrriiggeerraannttss aanndd aaiirr uunnddeerr pprreessssuurree mmaayy bbeeccoommeeccoommbbuussttiibbllee iinn tthhee pprreesseennccee ooff aann iiggnniittiioonn ssoouurrcceelleeaaddiinngg ttoo aann eexxpplloossiioonn.. EExxcceessssiivvee hheeaatt ffrroommssoollddeerriinngg,, bbrraazziinngg oorr wweellddiinngg wwiitthh rreeffrriiggeerraannttvvaappoorrss pprreesseenntt ccaann ffoorrmm hhiigghhllyy ttooxxiicc ggaasseess aannddeexxttrreemmeellyy ccoorrrroossiivvee aacciiddss..

Proper brazing techniques are essential when installingrefrigerant piping. The following factors should be keptin mind when forming sweat connections:

1. When heating copper in the presence of air, copperoxide forms. To prevent copper oxide from forminginside the tubing during brazing, sweep an inertgas, such as dry nitrogen, through the tubing. Anitrogen flow of 1 to 3 cubic feet per minute issufficient to displace the air in the tubing andprevent oxidation of the interior surfaces. Use a

pressure regulating valve or flow meter to controlthe flow.

2. Ensure that the tubing surfaces requiring brazingare clean, and that the tube ends are carefullyreamed to remove any burrs.

3. Make sure the inner and outer tubes of the joint aresymmetrical and have a close clearance, providingan easy “slip” fit. If the joint is too loose, theconnection’s tensile strength is significantlyreduced. Ensure the overlap distance is equal to theinner tube diameter.

4. Wrap each refrigerant line component with a wetcloth to keep it cool during brazing. Excessive heatcan damage the internal components.

NNoottee:: Use 40-45% silver brazing alloy (BAg-7 orBAg-28) on dissimilar metals. Use BCup-6brazing alloy on copper-to-copper joints.

5. If using flux, apply it sparingly to the joint. Excessflux will contaminate the refrigerant system.

6. Apply heat evenly over the length andcircumference of the joint.

7. Begin brazing when the joint is hot enough to meltthe brazing rod. The hot copper tubing, not theflame, should melt the rod.

8. Continue to apply heat evenly around the jointcircumference until the brazing material is drawninto the joint by capillary action, making amechanically sound and gas-tight connection.

9. Visually inspect the connection after brazing tolocate any pinholes or crevices in the joint. Use amirror if joint locations are difficult to see.

System Evacuation Procedures• Each refrigeration circuit must be evacuated before

the unit can be charged and started.

• Use a rotary type vacuum pump capable of pullinga vacuum of 100 microns or less.

• Verify that the unit disconnect switch and thesystem control circuit switches are “OFF”.

• Oil in the vacuum pump should be changed eachtime the pump is used with high quality vacuumpump oil. Before using any oil, check the oilcontainer for discoloration, which usually indicatesmoisture in the oil and/or water droplets. Moisturein the oil adds to what the pump has to removefrom the system, making the pump inefficient.

• When connecting vacuum pump to refrigerationsystem, it is important to manifold vacuum pump toboth high and low side of system (liquid line accessvalve and suction line access valve). Follow pumpmanufacturer’s directions for proper methods ofusing vacuum pump.

• Lines used to connect the pump to the systemshould be copper and of the largest diameter thatcan practically be used. Using larger line sizes with


94 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

minimum flow resistance can significantly reduceevacuation time.

NNoottee::

• Rubber or synthetic hoses are not recommendedfor system evacuation. They have moistureabsorbing characteristics that result in excessiverates of evaporation, causing pressure rise duringstanding vacuum test. This makes it impossible todetermine if system has a leak, excessive residualmoisture, or continual or high rate of pressureincrease due to hoses.

• Install an electronic micron vacuum gauge in thecommon line ahead of the vacuum pump shutoffvalve, as shown in Figure 47, p. 94. Close Valves Band C, and open Valve A.

Start vacuum pump. After several minutes the gaugereading will indicate the maximum vacuum thepump is capable of pulling. Rotary pumps shouldproduce vacuums of 100 microns or less.

NNOOTTIICCEEMMoottoorr WWiinnddiinngg DDaammaaggee!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouullddrreessuulltt iinn ccoommpprreessssoorr mmoottoorr wwiinnddiinngg ddaammaaggee..DDoo nnoott uussee aa mmeeggoohhmm mmeetteerr oorr aappppllyy vvoollttaaggeeggrreeaatteerr tthhaann 5500 VVDDCC ttoo aa ccoommpprreessssoorr mmoottoorrwwiinnddiinngg wwhhiillee iitt iiss uunnddeerr aa ddeeeepp vvaaccuuuumm..

• Open Valves B and C. Evacuate system to apressure of 300 microns or less. As vacuum is beingpulled on system, it may appear that no furthervacuum is being obtained, yet pressure is high. It isrecommended during evacuation process to“break” vacuum to facilitate evacuation.

• To break the vacuum, shut valves A, B, & C andconnect a refrigerant cylinder to charging port onmanifold. Purge air from hose. Raise standingvacuum pressure in system to “zero” (0 psig) gaugepressure. Repeat process two or three times duringevacuation.

NNoottee:: It is unlawful to release refrigerant into theatmosphere. When service proceduresrequire working with refrigerants, the servicetechnician must comply with all Federal,State, and local laws.

Standing Vacuum TestOnce 300 microns or less is obtained, close valve A andleave valves B and C open to allow the vacuum gaugeto read the actual system pressure. Let system equalizefor approximately 15 minutes. This is referred to as a“standing vacuum test” where time versus pressurerise. Maximum allowable rise over a 15 minute periodis 200 microns. If pressure rise is greater than 200microns but levels off to a constant value, excessivemoisture is present. If pressure steadily continues torise, a leak is indicated. Figure 48, p. 95 illustrates threepossible results of “standing vacuum test”.

If a leak is encountered, repair the system and repeatthe evacuation process until the recommendedvacuum is obtained. Once the system has beenevacuated, break the vacuum with refrigerant andcomplete the remaining Pre-Start procedures beforestarting the unit.

Figure 47. Typical vacuum pump hookup


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 95

Figure 48. Evacuation time vs. pressure rise

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

Pres

sure

in M

icro

ns

Time in Minutes

Continously increasing pressureindicates the presence of leaks,moisture, or both.

Initial evacuation pressure.

State of equilibrium indicates thetrue amount of moisture left inthe system. It indicates that noleaks are present and the systemis properly evacuated.

State of equilibrium indicates thetrue amount of moisture left inthe system. It indicates that noleaks, but requires further evacuation.

CompressorsScroll Compressor Failure Diagnosis andReplacementIf compressor failure is suspected, refer to COM-SVN01for detailed information regarding compressor failurediagnosis and replacement of scroll compressors.


96 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

ComponentsFigure 49. Typical water-cooled compressor section components

NNoottee:: Tighten bolts to 38 ft. lbs.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 97

Cleaning Coil Fin

WWAARRNNIINNGGHHaazzaarrddoouuss CChheemmiiccaallss!!CCooiill cclleeaanniinngg aaggeennttss ccaann bbee eeiitthheerr aacciiddiicc oorr hhiigghhllyyaallkkaalliinnee aanndd ccaann bbuurrnn sseevveerreellyy iiff ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh sskkiinnoorr eeyyeess ooccccuurrss..HHaannddllee cchheemmiiccaall ccaarreeffuullllyy aanndd aavvooiidd ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthhsskkiinn.. AALLWWAAYYSS wweeaarr PPeerrssoonnaall PPrrootteeccttiivveeEEqquuiippmmeenntt ((PPPPEE)) iinncclluuddiinngg ggoogggglleess oorr ffaaccee sshhiieelldd,,cchheemmiiccaall rreessiissttaanntt gglloovveess,, bboooottss,, aapprroonn oorr ssuuiitt aassrreeqquuiirreedd.. FFoorr ppeerrssoonnaall ssaaffeettyy rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee cclleeaanniinnggaaggeenntt mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss MMaatteerriiaallss SSaaffeettyy DDaattaa SShheeeettaanndd ffoollllooww aallll rreeccoommmmeennddeedd ssaaffee hhaannddlliinnggpprraaccttiicceess..

WWAARRNNIINNGGHHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggeeccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorrsseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmootteeddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunnccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerrlloocckkoouutt// ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerrccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aaCCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallllccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffeeddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

NNOOTTIICCEECCooiill DDaammaaggee!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnccooiill ddaammaaggee..DDoo nnoott cclleeaann tthhee rreeffrriiggeerraanntt ccooiill wwiitthh hhoott wwaatteerr oorrsstteeaamm aass iitt ccoouulldd ccaauussee hhiigghh pprreessssuurree iinnssiiddee tthheeccooiill ttuubbiinngg..DDoo nnoott uussee aacciiddiicc cchheemmiiccaall ccooiill cclleeaanneerrss.. AAllssoo,, ddoonnoott uussee aallkkaalliinnee cchheemmiiccaall ccooiill cclleeaanneerrss wwiitthh aa ppHHvvaalluuee ggrreeaatteerr tthheenn 88..55 ((aafftteerr mmiixxiinngg)) wwiitthhoouutt uussiinnggaann aalluummiinnuumm ccoorrrroossiioonn iinnhhiibbiittoorr iinn tthhee cclleeaanniinnggssoolluuttiioonn..

• Keep coils clean to maintain maximumperformance. For operation at its highest efficiency,clean the refrigerant coil often during periods ofhigh cooling demand or when dirty conditionsprevail. Clean the coil a minimum of once per yearto prevent dirt buildup in the coil fins, where it maynot be visible.

• Remove large debris from the coils and straightenfins before cleaning. Remove filters beforecleaning.

• Clean refrigerant coils with cold water anddetergent, or with one of the commercially

available chemical coil cleaners. Rinse coilsthoroughly after cleaning.

• Economizer and evaporator coils are installed sothe evaporator is directly behind the economizer.To clean between the coils, remove the sheet metalblock off. Access the block off by removing thecorner panels on the left or right rear side of theunit.

• If the refrigerant coil is installed back to back withthe waterside economizer coil, use a cleaner that isacceptable for cleaning both types of coils.

Inspecting and Cleaning CoilsCoils become externally fouled as a result of normaloperation. Coil surface dirt reduces heat transfer abilityand can cause comfort problems, increased airflowresistance and thus increased operating energy costs.

Inspect coils at least every six months or morefrequently as dictated by operating experience.Cleaning frequently is dependent upon systemoperating hours, filter maintenance, efficiency, and dirtload. Following is the suggested method for cleaningsteam and hot water coils.

Steam and Hot Water Coils



2. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment(PPE).

3. Access both sides of the coil section.

4. Use a soft brush to remove loose debris from bothsides of the coil.

5. Use a steam cleaning machine, starting from thetop of the coil and working downward. Clean theleaving air side of the coil first, then the entering airside. Use a block-off to prevent steam from blowingthrough the coil and into a dry section of the unit.

6. Repeat step 5 as necessary. Confirm that the drainline is open following completion of the cleaningprocess.

7. Allow the unit to dry thoroughly before putting the


98 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

system back into service.

8. Straighten any coil fins that may be damaged with afin rake.

9. Replace all panels and parts and restore electricalpower to the unit.

10. Ensure that contaminated material does not contactother areas of the equipment or building. Properlydispose of all contaminated materials and cleaningsolutions.

Refrigerant Coils



2. Wear the appropriate personal protectiveequipment (PPE).

3. Access to the coil section of the unit (both sides).


5. Mix a high quality coil cleaning detergent withwater according to the manufacturer’s instructions.If the detergent is strongly alkaline after mixing (pH8.5 or higher), it must contain an inhibitor. Carefullyfollow the cleaning solution manufacturer’sinstructions regarding product use.

6. Place the mixed solution in a garden pump-upsprayer or high pressure sprayer. If using a highpressure sprayer note the following:

• Maintain a minimum nozzle spray angle of 15°

• Spray perpendicular to the coil face

• Protect other areas of the equipment andinternal controls from contact with moisture orthe cleaning solution

• Keep the nozzle at least six inches from the coil

• Do not exceed 600 psig

Draining the Waterside Economizer Coil

NNOOTTIICCEECCooiill FFrreeeezzee--UUpp!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonn bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinneeqquuiippmmeenntt ddaammaaggee..DDrraaiinn aanndd vveenntt ccooiillss wwhheenn nnoott iinn uussee.. TTrraanneerreeccoommmmeennddss ggllyyccooll pprrootteeccttiioonn iinn aallll ppoossssiibblleeffrreeeezziinngg aapppplliiccaattiioonnss.. UUssee aa ggllyyccooll aapppprroovveedd ffoorruussee wwiitthh ccoommmmeerrcciiaall ccoooolliinngg aanndd hheeaattiinngg ssyysstteemmssaanndd ccooppppeerr ttuubbee ccooiillss..

Drain plugs are in the piping below supply and returnheader for each coil. Use these plugs to drain the coiland piping. When draining the coil, open the vents atthe top of the supply and return headers. Also, a drainplug is at the bottom of the inlet condenser manifoldand in the outlet pipe near the left side of the unit.Remove these plugs to drain the condensers. Be sureto open the vent plugs at the top of the condenser inletand outlet manifold. See .

When refilling the condenser/waterside economizercoil system with water, provide adequate watertreatment to prevent the formation of scale orcorrosion.

Cleaning the Condenser


Condensing water contains minerals that collect on thecondenser tube walls. Cooling towers also collect dustand foreign materials that deposit in the condensertube. The formation of scale or sludge in the condenseris indicated by a decreased water flow, lowtemperature difference between inlet and outlet water,and abnormally high condensing temperatures. Tomaintain maximum condenser efficiency, thecondenser must remain free of built-up scale andsludge. Clean the condenser either mechanically orchemically.


2. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment(PPE).

3. Access both sides of the coil section.



SCXF-SVX01R-EN 99

5. Use a steam cleaning machine, starting from thetop of the coil and working downward. Clean theleaving air side of the coil first, then the entering airside. Use a block-off to prevent steam from blowingthrough the coil and into a dry section of the unit.

6. Repeat step 5 as necessary. Confirm that the drainline is open following completion of the cleaningprocess.

7. Allow the unit to dry thoroughly before putting thesystem back into service.

8. Straighten any coil fins that may be damaged with afin rake.

9. Replace all panels and parts and restore electricalpower to the unit.

10. Ensure that contaminated material does not contactother areas of the equipment or building. Properlydispose of all contaminated materials and cleaningsolutions.

Chemical Cleaning of Condenser andEconomizer CoilChemical cleaning removes scale deposits built up byminerals in the water. For a suitable chemical solution,consult a water treatment specialist. The condenserwater circuit is composed of copper, steel, and castiron. The chemical supply house should approve orprovide all materials used in the external circulatingsystem, along with the quantity of cleaning material,duration of cleaning time, and safety precautionsnecessary for handling the cleaning agent.

Piping ComponentsWater Valves


Water valves have a stern packing nut. If there is

evidence of water leakage at the valve stem, proceed asfollows:

1. Remove actuator motor from support plate.

2. Remove shaft coupling.

3. Torque the packing nut to 10-ft.-lbs. of torque.

4. Replace shaft coupling.

5. Replace actuator motor.

Flow SwitchFlow switches have a magnet on the vane assemblythat attracts ferrous particulate may build up on themagnet to the point that the vane will wedge and notoperate properly. When the flow switch does notoperate, remove and replace.

Maintenance Periodic ChecklistsWWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss SSeerrvviiccee PPrroocceedduurreess!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww aallll pprreeccaauuttiioonnss iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaall aannddoonn tthhee ttaaggss,, ssttiicckkeerrss,, aanndd llaabbeellss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinnddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..TTeecchhnniicciiaannss,, iinn oorrddeerr ttoo pprrootteecctt tthheemmsseellvveess ffrroommppootteennttiiaall eelleeccttrriiccaall,, mmeecchhaanniiccaall,, aanndd cchheemmiiccaallhhaazzaarrddss,, MMUUSSTT ffoollllooww pprreeccaauuttiioonnss iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaallaanndd oonn tthhee ttaaggss,, ssttiicckkeerrss,, aanndd llaabbeellss,, aass wweellll aass tthheeffoolllloowwiinngg iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss:: UUnnlleessss ssppeecciiffiieedd ootthheerrwwiissee,,ddiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriiccaall ppoowweerr iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmootteeddiissccoonnnneecctt aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinnggddeevviicceess ssuucchh aass ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg..FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttooeennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaann nnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyyeenneerrggiizzeedd.. WWhheenn nneecceessssaarryy ttoo wwoorrkk wwiitthh lliivveeeelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss,, hhaavvee aa qquuaalliiffiieedd lliicceennsseeddeelleeccttrriicciiaann oorr ootthheerr iinnddiivviidduuaall wwhhoo hhaass bbeeeennttrraaiinneedd iinn hhaannddlliinngg lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttssppeerrffoorrmm tthheessee ttaasskkss..

Monthly ChecklistThe following check list provides the recommendedmaintenance schedule to keep the commercial self-contained equipment running efficiently.

1. Inspect unit air filters. Clean or replace if airflow isblocked or if filters are dirty.

2. Inspect coils for excess moisture or icing. Icing onthe coils may indicate low airflow supply, restrictedairflow from dirty fins, evaporator frost protectionsensor problems, or a shortage of refrigerantflowing through the coil.

3. Check that condensate from the evaporator andeconomizer coils flows freely through thecondensate piping, traps, drain pan, and drainageholes. Remove algae and or any airflowobstructions.


100 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

4. Check the condition and tension of fan belts. Adjusttension if belts are floppy or squeal continually.Replace worn or fraying belts in matched sets.

NNoottee:: Check belt tension and adjust it at least twicedaily the first days of new belt operation. Belttension will rapidly decrease until the beltsare run in.

5. Check the liquid line sight glasses during operation.Bubbles in the sight glasses indicate a possibleshortage of refrigerant or an obstruction in theliquid lines, e.g. dirty liquid line filter driers.

6. Inspect filter driers for leaks, flow obstructions, ortemperature drop across the filter drier. Anoticeable temperature differential, e.g. 5°F, in theliquid line may indicate an obstruction. Replace thefilter drier if it appears clogged.

7. Inspect the optional waterside economizer coil.Clean the coil to prevent airflow restrictionsthrough the fins.

8. Check and record operating pressures.

Semi-Annual Maintenance1. Verify the fan motor is properly lubricated. Follow

lubrication recommendations on the motor tag ornameplate. Contact the motor manufacturer formore information.

2. Lubricate fan bearings. For best results, lubricatebearings during unit operation. Refer to the “FanBearings” section for recommended grease.

NNoottee:: The bearings are manufactured using aspecial synthetic lithium-based greasedesigned for long life and minimum lubeintervals. Over lubrication can be just asharmful as not enough.

3. With power disconnected, manually rotate the fanwheel to check for obstructions in the housing or

interference with fan blades. Remove obstructionsand debris. Center the fan wheel if necessary.

4. Check the fan assembly sheave alignment. Tightenset screws to their proper torques.

5. Check water valves for leakage at valve stempacking nut.

NNoottee:: Perform this procedure monthly if the unit isin a coastal or corrosive environment.

Annual MaintenanceCheck and tighten all set screws, bolts, locking collarsand sheaves.

1. Inspect, clean, and tighten all electrical connections.

2. Visually inspect the entire unit casing for chips orcorrosion. Remove rust or corrosion and repaintsurfaces.

3. Visually check for leaks in refrigerant piping.

4. Inspect fan, motor, and control contacts. Replacebadly worn or eroded contacts.

5. Inspect the thermal expansion valve sensing bulbsfor cleanliness, good contact with the suction line,and adequate insulation from ambient air.

6. Verify the superheat setting is 12 -17°F at thecompressor.

When checking operating pressures and conditions,establish the following nominal conditions forconsistent measurements.

• Leaving air temperature greater than 60°F

• Entering air temperature is 80 - 90°F

• Entering water temperature greater than 65°F

• Compressors running at full load

• Drain the condensing water system and inspect itthoroughly for fouling; clean if necessary.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 101

DiagnosticsTroubleshootingSystem Checks

WWAARRNNIINNGGLLiivvee EElleeccttrriiccaall CCoommppoonneennttss!!FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww aallll eelleeccttrriiccaall ssaaffeettyy pprreeccaauuttiioonnsswwhheenn eexxppoosseedd ttoo lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss ccoouullddrreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..WWhheenn iitt iiss nneecceessssaarryy ttoo wwoorrkk wwiitthh lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaallccoommppoonneennttss,, hhaavvee aa qquuaalliiffiieedd lliicceennsseedd eelleeccttrriicciiaannoorr ootthheerr iinnddiivviidduuaall wwhhoo hhaass bbeeeenn pprrooppeerrllyy ttrraaiinneeddiinn hhaannddlliinngg lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss ppeerrffoorrmmtthheessee ttaasskkss..

Before proceeding with technical trouble charts orcontrols checkout, complete the following systemanalysis:

1. Measure actual supply voltage at the compressorand an motor terminals with the unit running.Voltage must be within the range listed on themotor nameplate. Phase imbalance must be lessthan 2.0%.

2. Check all wiring and connections to be sure thatthey are intact, secure and properly routed. The aswired system diagrams are provided in the unitcontrol panel.

3. Check that all fuses are installed and properly sized.

4. Inspect air filters and coils to be sure that airflow tothe unit is not restricted.

5. Check the zone thermostat settings.

6. Ensure that the fan is rotating in the properdirection. If phasing is wrong at the main powerterminal block, the fan and compressors will notrun correctly.

7. Inspect ductwork and duct connections fortightness.

Operating ProceduresInstall pressure gauges on the discharge and suctionline access valves. When the unit has stabilized (afteroperating approximately 15 minutes at full load),

record suction and discharge pressures. Systemmalfunctions such as low airflow, line restrictions,incorrect refrigerant charge, malfunctioning ofexpansion valves, damaged compressors, etc. willresult in pressure variations which are outside thenormal range.

NNoottee:: If phasing at the main incoming power terminalis incorrect, switch two of the three incomingpower leads. If a compressor has been replacedand the phase is changed at the compressor, itwill run backwards and discharge pressure willbe very low. To resolve incorrect compressorwire phasing, change phasing at the compressor.

It is important that pressures be measured under stableand constant conditions in order for the readings to beuseful.

Voltage ImbalanceVoltage imbalance on three-phase systems can causemotor overheating and premature failure. Maximumallowable imbalance is 2.0%, and the readings used todetermine it must be measured at the compressorterminals.

Voltage imbalance is defined as 100 times the sum ofthe division of the three voltages from the averagevoltage. If, for example, the three measured voltagesare 221, 230, 227, the average is:

221 + 230 + 227

3= 226 volts

Therefore, the percentage of voltage imbalance is:

100*(226-221)/226 = 2.2%

In this example, 2.2% imbalance of more than 2.0%exists, be sure to check the voltage at the unitdisconnect and terminal block switch. If an imbalanceat the unit disconnect switch does not exceed 2.0%, theimbalance is caused by faulty wiring within the unit. Besure to conduct a thorough inspection of the unitelectrical wiring connections to locate the fault, andmake any repairs necessary.

Table 49. Potential unit issues and solutions

Problem Possible Cause Remedy

Drain pan is overflowing Plugged drain line Unit not level Clean drain line Level unit

Standing water in drain pan Unit not level Plugged drain line Level Unit Clean drain line

Wet interior insulation Coil face velocity too high Improper trapdesign Drain pan leaks/overflowing

Condensation on surfaces

Reduce fan speed Design trap per unitinstallation instructions Repair Leaks Insulate

surfaces

102 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Table 49. Potential unit issues and solutions (continued)

Problem Possible Cause Remedy

Excess dirt in unit Missing filters Filter bypass Replace filters Reduce filter bypass

Microbial growth (mold) Standing water in drain pan See "Standing water in drain pan" above

Additional Diagnostic ResourcesRefer to the Self-Contained Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01, for specific unit programming andtroubleshooting information. In particular, reference

the “Service Mode Menu” and “Diagnostic Menu”sections in the programming guide. Refer to thefollowing text for general diagnostic andtroubleshooting procedures.

Category Diagnostic

AAuto Reset S/A Static Pressure Limit

Problem The supply air static pressure went too high. Reason for Diagnostic: The S/A static pressure exceeded the S/A static pressurelimit setpoint for at least one second continuously.

ControlsReaction

A “supply air pressure shutdown” signal is sent to the following functions:

• Compressor staging control

• Economizer actuator control

• Heat operation

• Supply fan control,

• VFD control

• Exhaust fan control

• Exhaust actuator control

ResetRequired

(PAR)The supply fan is not allowed to restart for 15 seconds after the diagnostic occurs. An auto reset will also occur if the unitcycles out of occupied mode and back.

CCO2 Sensor Failure

Problem The VCM CO2 sensor input signal is out of range.

Check Check field/unit wiring between sensor and VCM.

Reason forDiagnostic The unit is reading a signal that is out of range for the CO2 sensor transducer input.

ControlsReaction The CO2 reset function disables.

ResetRequired

(PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the CO2 sensor transducer input receives a signal that is within range for ten continuousseconds.

Compressor Contactor Fail—Circuit 1, 2, 3, or 4

Problem The compressor contactor for Ckt. 1, 2, 3, or 4 has malfunctioned.

Reason forDiagnostic

The circuit compressor proving input is detected closed continuously for more than three seconds while neither compressoroutput on that circuit closes.

ControlsReaction

A “lockout ckt #1, 2, 3, or 4” request is issued to the compressor staging control function.

ResetRequired (PMR) A manual reset is required after the diagnostic is set. It can be reset by the HI or Tracer Summit.

Compressor Trip—Ckt 1, 2, 3, or 4

Problem The compressor ckt #1, 2, 3, or 4 has tripped.

DDiiaaggnnoossttiiccss

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 103

Category Diagnostic


• The ckt #1, 2, 3, or 4 compressor proving input is detected open continuously for more than 3 seconds when either or bothcompressor outputs on that circuit energize (as described in the compressor protection function).

• The circuit compressor proving input is detected open continuously for more than 3 seconds when either or bothcompressor outputs on that circuit energize (as described in the compressor protection function).

ControlsReaction

A “lockout ckt #1, 2, 3, or 4” request is issued to the compressor staging control function.

ResetRequired

(PMR) A manual reset is required after this diagnostic occurs. The diagnostic can be reset by the unit mounted HI module orTracer Summit.

Condenser Temp Sensor Failure—Circuit 1, 2, 3, or 4

Problem The saturated condenser temperature input is out of range for circuit #1, 2, 3, or 4.

Check Sensor resistance should be between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7 ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring between sensorand MCM/SCM.


The unit is reading a signal that is out of range for the circuit #1, 2, 3, or 4 saturated condenser temperature sensor. (temp <-55°F or temp > 209°F).

ControlsReaction

A “Lockout Ckt # 1, 2, 3, or 4” request is issued to the compressor staging control function.

ResetRequired

(PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the circuit 1, 2, 3, or 4 condenser temp input returns to its allowable range within 10seconds.

DDirty Filter

Problem There is a dirty filter.

Reason forDiagnostic The filter switch input on the RTM is closed for more than 60 seconds continuously.

ControlsReaction

An information only diagnostic is set.

ResetRequired (INFO) An automatic reset occurs after the dirty filter input reopens for 60 continuous seconds.

EECEM Communications Failure

Problem The RTM has lost communication with the ECEM.

Check Field/unit wiring between RTM and ECEMmodule.

Reason forDiagnostic The RTM has lost communication with the ECEM.

ControlsReaction

If the unit has the comparative enthalpy option, the economizer enable r.e. enthalpy function will revert to level 2 enthalpycomparison.

ResetRequired (PAR) An automatic reset occurs after communication has been restored.

Emergency Stop

Problem The emergency top input is open.


An open circuit has occurred on the emergency stop input caused either by a high duct temp t-stat trip, or the opening of field-provided contacts, switch, etc.


104 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Category Diagnostic

ControlsReaction

Off or close requests are issued as appropriate to the following functions;

• Compressor staging/chilled water cooling control

• Heat operation

• Supply fan control and proof of operation

• Exhaust fan control and proof of operation.


• Outside air damper control

• On VAV units, VFD control

ResetRequired (PMR) A manual reset is required after the emergency stop input recloses. The diagnostic can be reset by the HI.

Entering CondenserWater Temperature Sensor Fail

ActivationConditions

Temperature < -50°F or temperature > 209°F, and unit configured for water-cooled condenser

Time toReact 10 sec < T < 20 sec

DiagnosticText

(HumanInterfaceDisplay)

“ENT CONDWATER TEMP SENSOR FAIL”

Actions tobe Initiated

A “Lockout All Ckts” request is issued to the “Compressor Staging Function”

Reset An automatic reset occurs after the entering condenser water temperature input returns to within range continuously for 15seconds.

EnteringWater Temperature Sensor Fail

Data used(module,packet,byte, bit)

WSM, 01,18,05


Temperature < -50°F or temperature > 209°F, and unit configured with water cooled condenser and/or economizer


DiagnosticText

(HumanInterfaceDisplay)

“ENTERING WATER TEMP SENSOR FAIL”


A “Disable Water Side Economizer” request is issued to “Water Side Economizer Temperature Enable Function”

Reset An automatic reset occurs after the Entering Water Temp. input returns to within range continuously for 10 seconds.

Evaporator Temperature Sensor Failure—Circuit 1, 2, 3, or 4

Problem The evaporator temperature sensor (ckt #1, 2, 3, or 4) is out of range.

Check Sensor resistance should be between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7Kohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring between sensorand MCM/SCM.


The unit is reading a signal that is out of range for the circuit #1 evaporator temperature sensor input (temp < -55°F or temp >209°F).

ControlsReaction

The coil frost protection function for the refrigeration circuit (#1, 2, 3, or 4) only is disabled.

ResetRequired (PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the #1, 2, 3, or 4 evaporator temp input returns to its allowable range for 10 seconds.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 105

Category Diagnostic

GGBAS 0-5 VDCModule Communication Failure

Problem The RTM has lost communication with the GBAS module.

Check Field/unit wiring between RTM and GBAS.

Reason forDiagnostic The RTM has lost communication with the GBAS module.

Reaction

The UCM will initiate the following actions;

• If the demand limit input was closed prior to the communications loss, then the demand limit commands issued to the heatoperation function (if applicable) and the compressor staging/chilled water cooling function will be cancelled.

• If any of the GBAS setpoint control parameters are the HI-selected setpoint sources, then those setpoints will revert to thedefault HI setpoints.

• Any active GBAS output control parameters will be ignored.

• A failsafe function in the GBAS module will cause all GBAS outputs to be zeroed and de-energized.


HHeat Failure

Problem The heat has failed. (Electric heat unit)Typically, this is because the electric heat section became too hot.


The heat fail input on the heat module was closed:

• For more than 80 seconds,

• For ten consecutive occurrences (each lasting five seconds or more) within a 210 second period.

ControlsReaction

A n information only diagnostic is set.

ResetRequired (INFO) An automatic reset occurs after the heat fail input remains open for 210 seconds continuously.

Heat Module Auxiliary Temperature Sensor Fail

Problem The heat mod aux temp sensor input is out of range.

Check Sensor resistance should be between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7 ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring between sensorand heat module.


At least one enabled unit function has the heat module auxiliary temperature input designated as its sensor, and the unit isreading a signal that is out of range for this input (temp < -55°F or temp > 209°F).

ControlsReaction

The functions that designated the heat module auxiliary temperature input as their input are disabled.

ResetRequired

(PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the heat module auxiliary temperature input returns to its allowable range for 10seconds.

Heat Module Comm Failure

Problem The RTM has lost communication with the heat module.

Check Check field/unit wiring between RTM and heat module.

Reason forDiagnostic The RTM has lost communication with the heat module.

ControlsReaction

• An “all heat off” request is sent to the heat operation function.

• If the unit has staged gas or electric heat, all heat module outputs will be zeroed and de-energized.

• If the unit has hydronic heat or chilled water installed, the unit will turn off the supply fan and close the outside air damperupon the occurrence of a heat module comm failure. A fail-safe function in the heat module will cause all water valves to beset to 100% to provide full water flow. Unless used for switching purposes (air handlers with chilled water and mod gas, orchilled water and hydronic heat) all binary outputs will be de-energized.


106 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Category Diagnostic


LLow Air Temperature Limit Trip

Problem The low air temp limit has tripped. (Units with steam or hot water heating, or air handlers with chilled water cooling)


A low air temp limit trip is detected continuously for more than one second. This can occur if the hydronic heat low air temp limitinput closes for > 1 second, or if the chilled water low air temp limit trip input opens for > 1 second. On units with both hydronicheat and chilled water, both low air temp limit inputs are active, and the unit will respond in the samemanner regardless ofwhich input is used.

ControlsReaction

The UCM will initiate the following actions:

• An “open all water valves” request is issued to the heat module function, causing any steam, hot water, or chilled watervalves on the unit to open.

• An “all heat off” request is issued to the heat control function.

• A “fan off” request is sent to the supply fan control function.

• A “close damper” request is sent to the economizer actuator control function.

ResetRequired

(PMR) A manual reset is required after the low air temp limit trip condition clears. The diagnostic can be reset at the unitmounted human interface, by Tracer Summit, or by cycling power to the RTM.

Low Pressure Control Open—Circuit 1, 2, 3, or 4

Problem The Low Pressure Control (LPC) for Ckt #1, 2, 3, or 4 is open.

Check State of refrigerant charge for ckt #1, 2, 3, or 4.

Reason forDiagnostic The Ckt # 1 LPC input is detected open as described in the compressor protection function.

ControlsReaction

A “Lockout Ckt # 1, 2, 3, or 4” request is issued to the compressor staging control function.

ResetRequired

(PMR) A manual reset is required anytime after the diagnostic is set. The diagnostic can be reset by the human interface, TracerSummit, or by cycling power to the RTM.

MManual Reset SA Static Press Limit

Problem The supply air static pressure went too high for the third consecutive time.


The auto reset supply air static pressure limit diagnostic has occurred for the third time while the unit is operating in occupiedmode.

Reaction

A “supply air pressure shutdown” signal is sent to the following functions;

• Compressor staging control,

• Economizer actuator control,

• Heat operation,

• Supply fan control,

• VFD control,

• Exhaust fan control


ResetRequired (PMR) A manual reset is required and can be accomplished at the HI, Tracer Summit, or by cycling power to the RTM.

MCM Communications Failure

Problem The RTM has lost communication with the MCM.

Check Check field/unit wiring between RTM and MCM.

Reason forDiagnostic The RTM has lost communications with the MCM.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 107

Category Diagnostic

ReactionA “Lockout” request is sent to the compressor staging control function. And a fail-safe function in the MCM will cause all MCMoutputs to be zeroed and de-energized.


Mode Input Failure

Problem The RTMmode input is out of range.

Check Sensor resistance should be between 1 ohm and 40 ohms. If so, check field/unit wiring between sensor and RTM.

Reason forDiagnostic The mode input signal on the RTM is out of range (resistance < 1 ohm or resistance > 40 ohms).

ControlsReaction

The systemmode reverts to the default (HI set) systemmode.

ResetRequired (INFO) An automatic reset occurs after the mode input returns to its allowable range for 10 seconds.

NNSB Panel Zone Temperature Sensor Failure

Problem The NSB panel's zone temp sensor input is out of range. (This input is at the NSB panel, not on the unit itself).

CheckIf have an external sensor connected to the NSB panel zone sensor input, then the internal NSB panel zone sensor should bedisabled. Verify sensor resistance. If in valid range, check wiring between the sensor and NSB panel.

NSB Panel Comm Failure

Problem The RTM has lost communications with the night setback panel (programmable zone sensor).

Check Field/unit wiring between RTM and NSB Panel.

Reason forDiagnostic The RTM has lost communication with the NSB panel.

ControlsReaction

The unit reverts to the next lower priority mode switching source (typically the HI default mode). If the NSB panel zone sensoris the designated sensor source for any functions, those functions are disabled.


OO/A Humidity Sensor Failure

Problem The outside air humidity sensor data is out of range.

Check Check field/unit wiring between the sensor and RTM.

Reason forDiagnostic The unit is reading a signal that is out of range for the outside air humidity sensor (humidity < 5% or humidity > 100%).

ControlsReaction

The economizer enable enthalpy function reverts to dry-bulb temperature changeover (“Level 1”) control.

ResetRequired (PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the OA humidity input returns to its allowable range for 10 seconds.

O/A Temp. Sensor Failure

Problem The outside air temperature sensor input is out of range.

Check Sensor resistance should be between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7 ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring between sensorand RTM.


The unit is reading a signal that is out of range for the outside air temperature input on the RTM (temp. < -55°F or temp > 209°F).


108 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Category Diagnostic

ControlsReaction

These unit functions occur:

• Low Ambient Compressor Lockout Disables

• O/A damper drives to minimum position

• On VAV units with S/A temp. reset type selected as O/A temp. reset, the reset type reverts to “none” for the duration of thefailure

ResetRequired

(PAR) an automatic reset occurs after the O/A temperature input returns to its allowable range. To prevent rapid cycling of thediagnostic, there is a 10 second delay before the automatic reset.

Occupied Zone Heat Setpoint Failure

Problem The occupied zone heat setpoint input is out of range.


The input designated as occupied zone heating setpoint source is out of range for the outside air temperature input on the RTM(temp. < 45°F or temp > 94°F).

Reaction The active occupied zone heating setpoint reverts to the default value.

ResetRequired

(PAR) an automatic reset occurs after the occupied zone heating setpoint input returns to its allowable range for 10 continuousseconds, or after a different occupied zone heating setpoint selection source is user-defined.

RReturn Air Humidity Sensor Failure

Problem On units with both airside economizer and comparative enthalpy installed, the return air humidity sensor input is out of range.

Check Check field/unit wiring between the sensor and ECEM.

Reason forDiagnostic The unit is reading a signal that is out of range for the return air humidity sensor (humidity < 5% or humidity > 100%).

Reaction The economizer enable r.e. enthalpy function reverts to reference enthalpy changeover (“Level 2”) control.

ResetRequired (PMR) An automatic reset occurs after the RA humidity input returns to its allowable range continuously for 10 seconds.

Return Air Temperature Sensor Failure

Problem On units with the comparative enthalpy option, the return air temperature sensor input is out of range.

Check Sensor resistance should be between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7 ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring between thesensor and ECEM.

Reason forDiagnostic The unit is reading a signal that is out of range for the return air humidity sensor (temp < -55°F or temp > 209°F).

Reaction The economizer enable r.e. enthalpy function reverts to reference enthalpy changeover (“Level 2”) control.

ResetRequired (PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the RA temp input returns to its allowable range continuously for 10 seconds.

RTM Auxiliary Temperature Sensor Failure

Problem The RTM auxiliary temperature sensor data is out of range.

Check Sensor resistance should be between 830 ohms (200°F)and 345.7 ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring between sensorand RTM.


At least one enabled unit function has the RTM auxiliary temperature input designated as its sensor, and the unit is reading asignal that is out of range for this input (temp. < -55°F or temp > 209°F).

ControlsReaction

The functions with the RTM auxiliary temperature input designated as their sensor are disabled.

ResetRequired

(PAR) an automatic reset occurs after the designated zone temperature signal returns to its allowable range. To prevent rapidcycling of the diagnostic, there is a 10 second delay before the automatic reset.

RTMData Storage Error

Problem There was a data transmission error.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 109

Category Diagnostic

CheckThis can be caused by an intermittent power loss. Turn the unit off for 1-2 minutes, then back on again. If diagnostic persists,then the RTMmay need to be replaced.

Reason forDiagnostic An error occurred while the RTM was writing data to its internal non-volitile memory (EEPROM).

ControlsReaction

An information only diagnostic will be displayed at the human interface.

ResetRequired (INFO) A manual reset may be made at the human interface, at Tracer Summit, or by cycling power to the RTM.

RTM Zone Sensor Failure

Problem The RTM zone temperature sensor input is out of range.



At least one enabled unit function has the RTM zone temperature input designated as its sensor, and the unit is reading a signalthat is out of range for this input (temp. < -55°F or temp > 150°F).

ControlsReaction

The functions with the RTM zone temperature input designated as their sensor are disabled.

ResetRequired

(PAR) an automatic reset occurs after the designated zone temperature signal returns to its allowable range. To prevent rapidcycling of the diagnostic, there is a 10 second delay before the automatic reset.

SSCM Communication Failure

Problem The RTM has lost communication with the SCM.

Check Check field/unit wiring between the RTM and SCM.

Reason forDiagnostic The RTM has lost communication with the SCM.

ControlsReaction

A “lockout” request is sent to the compressor staging control function. A fail-safe function in the SCM will cause all SCM outputsto be zeroed and de-energized.


Space Static Press Setpoint Failure

Problem The active space static pressure setpoint is out of range.

CheckCheck setpoint value. Also, if space pressure setpoint source is GBAS, but this setpoint has not been assigned to any of the fouranalog inputs on GBAS, this message will occur.

Reason forDiagnostic The unit is reading a signal that is out of range for the space static pressure setpoint (input < 0.03 iwc or input > 0.20 iwc).

ControlsReaction

The default space pressure setpoint will become the active space pressure setpoint.

ResetRequired

(PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the designated space pressure setpoint source sends a signal within range for 10continuous seconds, or after a different space pressure setpoint source is user-defined.

Supply Air Pressure Sensor Failure

Problem The supply air pressure sensor voltage input is out of range.

Check Check field/unit wiring between the sensor and RTM.

Reason forDiagnostic The unit is reading a signal that is out of range for the supply air pressure sensor voltage input (input < 40mV or input > 4.75V)

ControlsReaction

The following functions are disabled;

• SA pressure control

• SA static pressure limit


110 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Category Diagnostic

ResetRequired

(PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the SA temp heating setpoint input returns to within range for 10 continuous seconds, orafter a different SA temp heating setpoint selection source is user-defined.

Supply Air Pressure Setpoint Failure

Problem The SA pressure input signal is out of range.

Reason forDiagnostic The SA pressure setpoint input is sending a signal that is out of range (Input < 1.0 iwc or input > 4.3 iwc)

ControlsReaction

The default SA pressure setpoint will become the active SA pressure setpoint.

ResetRequired

(PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the designated SA pressure setpoint source sends a signal within range for 10 continuousseconds, or after a different SA pressure setpoint source is user-defined.

Supply Air Temperature Cool Setpoint Fail

Problem The active supply air temperature cooling setpoint is out of range.

Reason forDiagnostic The input designated as the SA temp cooling setpoint is out is out of range (temp < 35°F or temp > 95°F).

ControlsReaction

The default HI-set SA temp cooling setpoint becomes the active SA temp cooling setpoint.

ResetRequired

(PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the SA temp cooling setpoint input returns to within range for 10 continuous seconds, orafter a different SA temp cooling setpoint selection source is user-defined.

Supply Air Temperature Heat Setpoint Fail

Problem The active supply air temperature cooling setpoint is out of range.

Reason forDiagnostic The input designated as the SA temp heating setpoint is out is out of range (temp < 35°F or temp > 185°F).

ControlsReaction

The default HI-set SA temp heating setpoint becomes the active SA temp heating setpoint.

ResetRequired

(PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the SA temp heating setpoint input returns to within range for 10 continuous seconds, orafter a different SA temp heating setpoint selection source is user-defined.

Supply Air Temperature Failure

Problem The supply air temperature sensor input is out of range.



The unit is reading a signal that is out of range for the supply air temperature input on the RTM (temp. < -55°F or temp > 209°F).

ControlsReaction

These unit functions are disabled:

• Supply air tempering

• Economizing

• Supply air temperature low limit function (CV units)

• Supply air temperature control heating and cooling functions (VAV units)

ResetRequired

(PAR) an automatic reset occurs after the designated S/A temperature input returns to its allowable range. To prevent rapidcycling of the diagnostic, there is a 10 second delay before the automatic reset.

Supply Fan Failure

Problem There is no supply airflow indication after the supply fan is requested on.

CheckCheck belts, linkages, etc. on the supply fan assembly. If these are ok, check field/unit wiring between RTM and supply fan. Ifthe supply fan runs in service mode, then verify airflow proving switch and wiring.


• The supply airflow input is detected OPEN for 40 continuous seconds during any period of time in which the supply fanbinary output is ON. between 830 ohms (200°F) and 345.7 ohms (-40°F). If so, check field/unit wiring between the sensorand MCM.

• This input is ignored for up to 5 minutes after the supply fan starts, until airflow is first detected.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 111

Category Diagnostic

ControlsReaction

“Off” or “Close” requests are issued as appropriate to the following functions;

• Compressor staging/chilled water control

• Heat operation

• Supply fan control & proof of operation

• Exhaust fan control & proof of operation


• Economizer actuator control

• VFD control

ResetRequired

(PMR) A manual reset is required anytime after the diagnostic is set. The diagnostic can be reset at the HI, Tracer Summit, or bycycling power to the RTM.

Supply Fan VFD Bypass Enabled


RTM

Activationconditions

Supply fan VFD bypass has been activated and supply fan vfd bypass is installed.


Diagnostictext

(humaninterfacedisplay)

“SUPPLY FAN VFD BYPASS ENABLED”

Actions tobe Initiated NONE

Reset The INFO diagnostic is cleared when the supply fan VFD bypass is deactivated.

TLCI Module Comm Failure

Problem The RTM has lost communication with the LCI.

Check Check field/unit wiring between RTM and LCI module.

Reason forDiagnostic The RTM has lost communication with the LCI module.

ControlsReaction

All active commands and setpoints provided by Tracer Summit through the LCI will be canceled and/or ignored. And whereTracer Summit has been designated as setpoint source, local HI default setpoints will be used.


Tracer Communications Failure

Problem LCI has lost communication with Tracer Summit.

CheckTracer Summit (building control panel) is powered up and running properly. If so, check unit wiring between LCI and TracerSummit (building control panel).

Reason forDiagnostic The LCI has lost communications with Tracer Summit for > 15 minutes.

ControlsReaction

All active commands and setpoints provided by Tracer Summit through the LCI will be canceled and/or ignored. And whereTracer Summit has been designated as the setpoint source, local HI default setpoints are used.

ResetRequire (PAR) An automatic reset occurs after communication between Tracer Summit and the LCI is restored.

U


112 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Category Diagnostic

Unit HI Communications Failure

Problem The RTM has lost communication with the unit mounted (local) human interface (HI).

Check Field/unit wiring between RTM hand local HI.

Reason forDiagnostic The RTM has lost communication with the unit-mounted human interface.

ControlsReaction

A fail-safe function in the HI will cause the following sequence:

1. Disallow any interaction between the HI and the RTM (or any other modules)

2. Render all HI keystrokes ineffective

3. Cause the following message to display on the unit-mounted HI display: “Local HI communications loss. Check comm linkwiring between modules.” If the unit has a remote HI option, then this diagnostic will display as any other automatic resetdiagnostic.

ResetRequired

(INFO) An automatic reset occurs after communication is restored between the RTM and the HI. When the failure screen clears,the general display restores to allow the HI to interact with the RTM again.

Unoccupied Zone Cool Setpoint Failure

Problem The unoccupied zone cooling setpoint input is out of range.

Reason forDiagnostic The input designated as the unoccupied zone cooling setpoint source is out of range (temp < 45°F or temp > 94°F).

ControlsReaction

The active unoccupied zone cooling setpoint reverts to the default value.

ResetRequired

(PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the designated unoccupied zone cool setpoint input returns to its allowable range for 10continuous seconds, or after the user defines a different, valid unoccupied zone cool setpoint selection source.

Unoccupied Zone Heat Setpoint Failure

Problem The unoccupied zone heating setpoint input is out of range.

Reason forDiagnostic The input designated as unoccupied zone heating setpoint source is out of range (temp < 45 F or temp > 94 F).

ControlsReaction

The active unoccupied zone heating setpoint reverts to the default value.

ResetRequired

(PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the designated unoccupied zone heat setpoint input returns to its allowable range for 10continuous seconds, or after the user defines a different, valid unoccupied zone heating setpoint selection source.

VVCM Communication Failure

Problem The RTM has lost communication with the VCM.

Verify Check field/unit wiring between RTM and VCM.

Reason forDiagnostic RTM has lost communication with VCM.

ControlsReaction

All active commands and setpoints provided by the VCM are canceled and/or ignored. A fail-safe function in the VCM will causeall outputs to de-energize and/or set to zero. The outside air damper minimum position function will revert to using the O/Aflow compensation function if O/A flow compensation is enabled or set to the default minimum position function if O/A flowcompensation is disabled or not available.

ResetRequired (PAR) An automatic reset occurs after communication is restored.

Velocity Pressure Sensor Failure

Problem The velocity pressure input signal is out of range.

Check Check field/unit wiring between sensor and VCM.


The unit is reading a signal that is out of range for the velocity pressure transducer input (during calibration: V < 40 mV or V >420 mV, during operation: V < 40 mV or V > 0.75 V).


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 113

Category Diagnostic

ReactionThe minimum airflow control function is disabled. The outside air damper minimum position function reverts to using the O/Aflow compensation function if O/A flow compensation is enabled or to the default minimum position function if O/A flowcompensation is disabled or not available.

ResetRequired

(PAR) An automatic reset occurs after the designated space pressure transducer sends a signal within range for 10 continuousseconds.

VOM Communications Failure

Problem The RTM has lost communication with the VCM.

Check Field/unit wiring between RTM and VCM.

Reason forDiagnostic The RTM has lost communications with the VOM.

ControlsReaction

Ventilation override actions will not be allowed, and the VO Output relay will be de-energized.


WWSMCommunications Fail

Problem The RTM has lost communication with the WSM.

Check Field/unit wiring between RTM and WSM.

Reason forDiagnostic RTM has lost communication with WSM.

ControlsReaction

UCM will react as if a freezestat has occurred by issuing:

• “All heat on” or “mod output full open” request to “heat control”

• A “fan off” request to “supply fan control”

• “Close damper” request to “economizer actuator control”

• Water pump to turn on and position all water valves to provide maximum flow through all water source heat exchangers

• Disables preheat function if WSMmixed air temp sensor is selected as preheat sensor

ResetRequired An automatic reset occurs after one complete set of IPC packets is received.

WSMMixed Air Temp Sensor Fail


Temperature <-50°F or temperature >209°F, and sensor is selected for use by “waterside economizer temperature enablefunction” or “preheat function”



“Waterside economizer temperature enable function” uses supply air cooling setpoint instead of mixed air temperature. Ifmixed air temperature is used for “preheat function”, issue a “disable” request to “preheat function”.

Reset An automatic reset occurs after mixed air temp. input returns to within range continuously for 10 seconds.

Water Flow Fail


WSM, 01,19, 05


Water flow input is detected open:

• At the end of pre-cool water flow initiation state, or

• Continuously for five minutes while:

– Water side economizer is open 100%,

– Presetting of a head pressure valve, or

– Demand for mechanical cooling.


114 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Category Diagnostic

Unit mustbe

Configured with water cooled condenser and/or water economizer and have water flow switch installed.

Time toReact Immediate


A “lockout all ckts” request is issued to the “compressor staging function”

Reset Automatic reset occurs after water flow input returns to within range continuously for 3 seconds, water pump is requested OFF,or water flow switch becomes not installed.

ZZone Cool Setpoint Failure

Problem Occupied zone cooling setpoint is out of range.

Reason forDiagnostic Input designated as occupied zone cooling setpoint source is out of range (temp. < 45°F or > 94°F).

ControlsReaction

The active occupied zone cooling setpoint reverts to the default occupied zone cooling setpoint.

ResetRequired

(PAR) an automatic reset occurs after designated occupied zone CSP input returns to its allowable range for 10 continuousseconds, or after a different valid occupied zone CSP selection source is user-defined.


SCXF-SVX01R-EN 115

Wiring Diagrams

NNoottee:: For easier access, published unit wiringdiagrams (individual, separate diagrams forunitary product lines) will become available via

e-Library instead of through wiring manualsafter 2007.

Number Description

2307-8257 Field Wiring Diagram S*WF 20 -80T & S*RF 20-60T

2307-8258 Schematic DiagramWith VFD Single Point Pwr S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8260 Schematic DiagramWith VFD RTM Module S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8262 Schematic DiagramWith VFDW/Bypass RTM Module S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8263 Connection DiagramWith VFDW/ or W/O Bypass S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8295 Schematic DiagramWith VFD Dual Point Pwr S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8296 Schematic DiagramWith VFDW/Bypass Dual Point Pwr S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8298 Schematic DiagramWith VFD Single Point Pwr S*WF 85T

2307-8299 Schematic DiagramWith VFDW/Bypass Single Point Pwr S*WF 85T




2307-8349 Connection DiagramW/ or W/O VFDW/ or W/O Bypass S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8404 Field Wiring Diagram Single Point Pwr S*WF 85T

2307-8406 Schematic DiagramWith VFD RTM Module S*WF 85T

2307-8407 Schematic DiagramWith VFDW/Bypass RTM Module S*WF 85T

2307-8412 Connection Diagram CV S*WF 85 Ton

2307-8415 Connection DiagramW/ VFDW/Bypass S*WF 85 Ton

2307-8416 Connection DiagramW/ or W/O VFDW/ or W/O Bypass S*WF 85T

2307-8424 Connection DiagramW/ VFDW/ or W/O Bypass S*WF 85 Ton


2307-8259 Schematic DiagramWith VFDW/Bypass Single Point Pwr S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2309-4612 Connection DiagramWith VFDW/ or W/O Bypass S*WF 90, 100 & 110T

2309-4601 Schematic DiagramWith VFD Single Point Pwr 90 -110T

2309-4602 Schematic DiagramWith VFDW/Bypass Single Point Pwr 90 -110T

2309-4603 Schematic DiagramWith VFD RTM Module S*WF 90 - 110T

2309-4604 Schematic DiagramWith VFDW/Bypass RTM Module S*WF 90 - 110T





2309-4613 Field Wiring Diagram Single Point Pwr S*WF 90 - 110T


116 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

Number Description


2307-8251 Schematic Diagram CV Single Point Pwr S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8294 Schematic Diagram CV Dual Point Pwr S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8259 Schematic DiagramW/VFDW/Bypass Single Point Pwr S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8253 Schematic Diagram CV RTM Module S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8277 Schematic DiagramWater-Cooled S*WF 20-80T

2307-1015 Schematic Diagram Air-Cooled S*RF 30 - 50T

2307-8278 Schematic Diagram Air-Cooled S*RF 60T

2307-8279 Schematic Diagram Air-Cooled S*RF 20, 25 & 29T

2307-8255 Schematic Diagram Heat, Vent Cntrl & GBAS S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

1213-1730 Schematic Diagram ECEM, VOM LCI, IPCB, HI & RHI Mod S*WF 20-80T S*RF 20-60T

2307-8261 Connection Diagram CV S*WF 20-80 & S*RF 20-60T



2307-8297 Connection Diagram CV S*WF 85T

2307-8405 Connection Diagram CV RTM Module S*WF 85T

2307-8293 Schematic DiagramWater-Cooled S*WF 85T

2307-8408 Schematic Diagram Heat, Vent Cntrl & GBAS S*WF 85T

2307-8409 Schematic Diagram ECEM, VOM LCI, IPCB, HI & RHI Mod S*WF 85T



2309-4605 Schematic DiagramWater-Cooled S*WF 90, 100 & 110T

2309-4606 Schematic Diagram Heat, Vent Cntrl & GBAS S*WF 90, 100 & 110T

1213-1732 Schematic Diagram ECEM, VOM LCI, IPCB, HI & RHI Mod S*WF 90, 100 & 110T

2307-8359 Field Wiring Diagram Ipak Controls CCRC 20-60 Ton

2307-8332 Schematic Diagram Ipak Controls CCRC 20, 29 & 32 Ton

2307-8282 Schematic Diagram Ipak Controls CCRC 35 & 40 Ton

2307-8283 Schematic Diagram Ipak Controls CCRC 50 & 60 Ton

2308-8284 Connection DiagramWith Ipak Controls CCRC 20-60 Ton

WWiirriinngg DDiiaaggrraammss

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 117

NNootteess

118 SCXF-SVX01R-EN

NNootteess

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 119

NNootteess

Trane - by Trane Technologies (NYSE: TT), a global innovator - creates comfortable, energy efficientindoor environments for commercial and residential applications. For more information, please visittrane.com or tranetechnologies.com.

Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvements and reserves the right to change design and specifications withoutnotice. We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices.

SCXF-SVX01R-EN 10 Apr 2020

Supersedes SCXF-SVX01Q-EN (June 2018) ©2020 Trane

installation, operation, and maintenance intellipak

Documents